Manual

ManualsBrandsETC ManualsControl panelCobalt Family v7.1.0

Product information and specificatio n s s u b j ect to chan g e .

Part Number:

Rev A

Released: 2014- 06

User Manual

v7.1

Family

™

4370M1200-7.1.0

Summary of content (1055 pages)

PAGE 1
™ User Manual Famil y v7.1 C op y r ig h t © 2014 E le c tr onic T hea t r e C on t r ols, I n c . A ll R igh t s r es e r ve d . P r oduc t inf o r ma t i on and specificatio n s s u bj ect to chan g e . P a r t N umb e r : 4370M1200-7.1.
PAGE 2
E T C p e r m i t s t h e r e p r o d u c t i o n o f m a te r i a l s i n t h is m a nu a l o n l y f o r n o n - c o m m e r c i a l p u r p o s e s . A l l o t h e r r i g h t s a r e reserved by ETC. E T C i n t en d s t h i s d o c u m e n t , w h e th e r p r i n t e d o r e l e c t r o n i c , t o b e p r o v i d e d i n i t s e n t i r e t y .
PAGE 3
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Table Of Contents Table Of Contents ........................................................................................................................... 2 Cobalt Help System 7.1 ................................................................................................................ 32 COBALT HELP SYSTEM ........................................................................................................... 33 This Manual - Using the Help system ......................
PAGE 4
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Control (workflow) ............................................................................................................... 60 Record (workflow) ................................................................................................................ 61 Playback (workflow) ............................................................................................................. 62 Edit (workflow) ........................................................................
PAGE 5
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Editing In Lists ...................................................................................................................... 87 Sort By Column .................................................................................................................... 88 Change The List View .......................................................................................................... 88 Drag and Drop ......................................................................
PAGE 6
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Creating Subfolders For Files ............................................................................................. 135 Delete a Play ....................................................................................................................... 135 Save Copy to... ........................................................................................................................ 136 Import from... ...................................................................
PAGE 7
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Play Settings - Crossfade ........................................................................................................ 184 Crossfade Settings ............................................................................................................... 185 Play Settings - Master ............................................................................................................. 187 Master Settings...................................................................
PAGE 8
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Find/configure CEM + ............................................................................................................ 222 Net3/ACN Device List............................................................................................................ 223 Screens .................................................................................................................................... 224 Screen Names.................................................................
PAGE 9
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Macros - Record & Playback .............................................................................................. 259 Patching....................................................................................................................................... 261 Patch - Introduction ................................................................................................................ 262 Flexible Patching (7.1) .....................................................
PAGE 10
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Templates - Editor .................................................................................................................. 295 Template Editor - Columns & Functions ............................................................................ 297 Templates - Create .................................................................................................................. 298 Templates - Type LTP or HTP ..................................................................
PAGE 11
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Group List - Columns & Functions .................................................................................... 337 Groups - Display List .............................................................................................................. 338 Groups - Load To Playbacks .................................................................................................. 339 Presets ............................................................................................
PAGE 12
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Multiple Import & Undo ...................................................................................... 374 Sequences.................................................................................................................................... 376 Sequences - Introduction ........................................................................................................ 377 Record a Sequence Live...............................................................
PAGE 13
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Build & Modify Modes ...................................................................................... 408 Sequence - Build Sequence Mode ...................................................................................... 409 Sequence - Modify Sequence Mode ................................................................................... 409 Sequences - Block Values...................................................................................................
PAGE 14
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Introduction .......................................................................................................... 453 Channels - Functions................................................................................................................... 454 Channels - Views .................................................................................................................... 455 Navigating - Channel Views .................................................
PAGE 15
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Select the Live Tab ............................................................................................................. 492 Selecting channels with mouse ........................................................................................... 493 Channel viewing formats .................................................................................................... 494 Channel View Zoom ..................................................................................
PAGE 16
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Park - Edit Parked Values ....................................................................................................... 531 Park - Un-parking Values ....................................................................................................... 532 Park - Parked Items List.......................................................................................................... 534 >Settings and Tools - Channels ........................................................
PAGE 17
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Devices........................................................................................................................................ 571 Devices - Introduction ............................................................................................................ 572 Devices - Multicell Devices (7.1) ....................................................................................... 573 Devices - Compound Devices (7.1) ..............................................
PAGE 18
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Changed mode .................................................................................................................... 610 Active Mode & Mark .......................................................................................................... 613 Active Mode & Attribute Tracking..................................................................................... 613 Device Recording - All Attributes .....................................................................
PAGE 19
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Play back - Introduction ............................................................................................. 654 Device Play back - Attributes Follow Faders ......................................................................... 655 Masters And Attributes - General ....................................................................................... 655 Crossfaders And Attributes .....................................................................................
PAGE 20
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effects - Record ...................................................................................................................... 686 Effects - Channel Distribution Wizard ................................................................................... 687 Live Effects ............................................................................................................................. 689 Effect Playbacks ...............................................................
PAGE 21
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Table Editor ........................................................................................................................ 723 Live Dynamics (old) ............................................................................................................... 726 Live Dynamic Effects - Columns........................................................................................ 727 Old Dynamic Effects ........................................................................
PAGE 22
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamics - Loop Count .......................................................................................................... 745 Dynamics - Fade ..................................................................................................................... 746 Dynamics - Form .................................................................................................................... 747 Dynamics - Fetch From A Preset ..................................................
PAGE 23
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequence Editor ...................................................................................................................... 784 Load Sequence ........................................................................................................................ 785 Independents ............................................................................................................................... 786 Independents - Introduction ......................................
PAGE 24
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master settings for presets .................................................................................................. 820 Masters - Groups ..................................................................................................................... 822 Load a group to a master ..................................................................................................... 822 Master settings for groups .............................................................
PAGE 25
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Fading Two Scene Masters ................................................................................................. 855 Create new looks in Blind and record to masters................................................................ 856 Fader Mode - Expanded Masters ............................................................................................ 857 Fader Mode - Expanded Effects .........................................................................................
PAGE 26
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 CONSOLE KEYS....................................................................................................................... 890 Console Key Quick Help ........................................................................................................ 891 Console Key - ? ................................................................................................................... 891 Console Key - <-- (Disp Mode) .......................................................
PAGE 27
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - EFFECT ...................................................................................................... 903 Console Key - EFFECT OVERVI ...................................................................................... 903 Console Key - ESC ............................................................................................................. 904 Console Key - FADER MODE......................................................................................
PAGE 28
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - MINUS PERCENT (-%) ............................................................................ 916 Console Key - MODIFY ..................................................................................................... 916 Console Key - MODIFY SEQ ............................................................................................ 917 Console Key - MUTE .........................................................................................................
PAGE 29
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - SEQ ............................................................................................................. 929 Console Key - SEQ + .......................................................................................................... 930 Console Key - SEQ -........................................................................................................... 930 Console Key - >> (Master Playback).............................................................
PAGE 30
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Device Attribute Editors ................................................................................... 950 Shortcuts - Device Masking ................................................................................................ 951 Shortcuts - Device Palette Recording ................................................................................. 951 Shortcuts - Device Palette Activating ...........................................................................
PAGE 31
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 RFR Playback ..................................................................................................................... 980 RFR Patch ........................................................................................................................... 980 RFR Palettes........................................................................................................................ 981 RFR Focus Mode ................................................................
PAGE 32
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 MIDI - Implementation Chart ............................................................................................... 1017 Console Keys - MIDI Chart .............................................................................................. 1018 Console Faders - MIDI Chart ........................................................................................... 1022 RDM Functionality ...........................................................................................
PAGE 33
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Cobalt Help System 7.1 Hold ? and press any key to get a short help. To exit press ESC.
PAGE 34
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 COBALT HELP SYSTEM This is the manual for the Cobalt Family. This manual covers Cobalt20, Cobalt10, Cobalt Nomad Cobalt Lightserver, Client and Offline editor. The introduction contains the following sections • • • • This Manual - Using the Help System ***News In This Version*** This Manual - Terminology Disclaimer There is an appendix for running Cobalt in Congo hardware.
PAGE 35
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 This Manual - Using the Help system To open the help system, press the HELP key in the Programming Section. Hold help key and press any other key for quick help. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 36
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 In the Browser you can display the table of contents. The right arrow expands a topic and the left arrow jumps to the parent and closes. Press MODIFY or tap to open a topic. Help System - Change Language The help system is available in a number of languages. The displayed language is selected in the System Settings. Help - Search Function Click on the magnifying glass in HELP to get the search function.. Tap to go to to a link.
PAGE 37
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Help System - Favourites Tap on the NOTE symbol in the Help tab. A dialog allows you to enter a descriptive text for the chapter you are tagging as a favourite. 1. 2. 3. 4. Tap to open the Favorite dialog. Show Favorites in Help tab. Favorites. Enter notes for a Favorite. To delete a Note - focus it in the Browser and press DELETE.
PAGE 38
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Help System - Console Keys Navigating in the help can be done as a paper manual (next or last page) and as a web browser (previous page). Action Key Feedback Scroll [Down_Arrow] & Wheel Scrolls up/down within this page. Next [Down_Arrow] Steps to the next page. Previous [Up_Arrow] Steps to the previous page. Last visited page [Left_Arrow] Steps to the last visited page.
PAGE 39
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 ***News in This Version *** This chapter presents the news and changes in new versions of the software. Since this is the 7.0 first version of Cobalt, everything is news. However, here are a few sections that may be of help and interest for you, depending on where you are coming from.
PAGE 40
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 News in Cobalt 7.1 These are the Key Enhancements in v7.1. Search for "7.1" in the Help system to find all changes and updates. • • • • • • • • • • • • • Improved Import Template Wizard with search filter. Read here >> Flexible Patching. Read here >> DMX Settings moved into Browser. Read here >> A User Library for collecting often-used, new or modified device templates. Read here >> Improved handling of multi-cell and compound devices.
PAGE 41
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Coming to Cobalt from Congo Your main difference will be that Cobalt is so much faster. Making a transition from Congo to Cobalt is simple. All of your old shows are compatible, and 100% of the functionality you are used to. However, you will find that some things are handled differently by the hardware, and in ways that eliminate hundreds of key presses in a session.
PAGE 42
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 This Manual - Terminology This manual is intended for use with the Cobalt lighting control system by ETC. The on-line manual and the paper manual are the exact same document. In order to be specific about where features and commands are found, the following naming and text conventions will be used • • • • • • Cobalt processor (hardware): the computer used to run the Cobalt applications. Cobalt Facepanel (hardware): the control console hardware.
PAGE 43
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Disclaimer We do everything possible to guarantee the reliability of this system. Please don't load other software onto your Cobalt lighting console. ETC has tested the configuration of this system to guarantee its best performance. Additional software or unauthorized changes within the operating system may significantly affect the performance of this lighting control system.
PAGE 44
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 GETTING STARTED Getting Started is about understanding the basic terminology and workflow. • • • General Info Workflow In Cobalt Troubleshooting NOTE If you are new to Cobalt, we recommend you spend half an hour on the Workflow in Cobalt.
PAGE 45
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 General Info This chapter describes the key syntaxes, basic software and control terminology.
PAGE 46
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 System Overview Cobalt is a control system for conventional lights, moving devices, scrollers and media servers. Cobalt maintains the simplicity of classic systems with the feature-rich functionality of a dedicated moving lights console. Clean functions for everyday theatre work with conventional lights, plus advanced control of hundreds of moving lights, without mouse operations or computer menus.
PAGE 47
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Specification General Information full-featured console for control of conventional and moving lights, media servers and leDs with builtin articulating high-resolution multi- touch displays, backlit command keypad, keyboard tray, 40 hands-on multipurpose masters (20 motorized faders + 20 endless backlit pototentiometers), preset operation, main crossfader playback and full network capabilities, including backup and multi-console operation.
PAGE 48
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Output protocols are distributed using etCnet2 DmX nodes or net3 DmX/rDm Gateways. I/o Gateways and Show Control Gateways provide switch-closure functionality, mIDI and SmPte time code.Cobalt 20 is offered as a base console with 5000 control channels and 4096 outputs (8 universes of DmX512a). a single control channel may control only intensity (dimmers) or it may control a DmX-controlled device (moving light, leD, media server, etc.).
PAGE 49
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 50
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 51
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Setup Guide This setup guide provides identification of the inputs and outputs on the Cobalt 10 and Cobalt 20 control desks and related hardware systems, as well as provides important information regarding initial setup and use. Cobalt 20 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Desk Lamp Vents: Make sure to keep these vents clear of any obstructions.
PAGE 52
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Cobalt 10 The Cobalt 10 has the same connectors and specifications, except there are no switched outlets (3). Cobalt Light Server, Congo Kid & Congo Jr The Cobalt Light Server, Congo Kid & Congo Jr have the same connectors for everything except monitors, and there are two ethernet connectors instead of three.
PAGE 53
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Installation guidelines Equipment required to run this system • • • • Cobalt20, Cobalt10, Cobalt Nomad, Net3 RVI, Client software Power cables Up to three external DVI multi touch monitors. DMX512 or Ethernet cable(s) to external equipment Connect the monitor signal cable(s) from the back of the console to the monitor(s), and then connect the power cables to a 230/110V outlet and start all units. After approximately 30 seconds Cobalt should be running. See Power-up Procedure.
PAGE 54
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Key Syntaxes There are mainly two kinds of keys in the console: keys with a fixed function, and softkeys in the screens. Keys in the Cobalt can behave in the following ways Function Description Example Direct Will perform a function directly when it is pressed. GO and PAUSE in the Main Playback Numerical Prefix Requires a numerical entry (09) before it is pressed.
PAGE 55
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Cobalt Terminology It can be easier to understand Cobalt if you are familiar with the basic terminology. Channels (terminology) A Channel is the control handle used to call anything controlled by Cobalt. Regardless if it is a dimmer channel, a moving device, a smoke machine or something else it will always correspond to a channel number in the Patch. A channel will control nothing unless it is patched. You can start with a patch 1:1.
PAGE 56
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets (terminology) The basic building block combining channel intensities, device parameters and referenced data such as palettes is stored in a Preset. The combination of a Preset and a Sequence Step is the equivalent of a "Cue" in many other systems. The advantage here is that Presets can be reused in any Sequence, with different times. A Preset can be played back from any of the 80 Master Playbacks as well.
PAGE 57
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Control Hierarchy The control hierarchy is this • • • • • • Intensity is handled with highest-takes-precedence (HTP) logic, meaning the highest output level will be the "winner" and have control of those channels. Attributes are handled using last-takes-precedence (LTP) logic, meaning the last instruction given to the attribute will be the winner. There is a Grand Master and Inhibit Masters that can subtract from the output.
PAGE 58
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Control Hierarchy - Master Playbacks Light output from the Masters is added to the output on a Highest Takes Precedence basis. Device attributes are controlled by Last Takes Precedence. • • Any master set to Inhibit Mode will subtract the assigned channels from the output similar to the function of the Grand Master. Any master set to Exclusive Mode will be the only master controlling the assigned channels, and they are masked from recording.
PAGE 59
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Software & Update We constantly update the Cobalt software with new features, bug fixes and changes. Check www.etcconnect.com periodically to see if there's a more recent version than the one you are currently working with. Software versions come in two types: Beta release and Official release. Beta releases are test versions, which are not meant for use on real Plays. Once Beta releases are tested and proven reliable, they become official releases.
PAGE 60
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Workflow in Cobalt The workflow in Cobalt can be divided into five steps This chapter is a simplified introduction to this workflow - meant to serve as an introduction to the basic functionality of the system. Patch Before you can control a dimmer or device it has to be patched to a channel. See Patch (workflow). Control Control is how you select channels, set levels and control parameters. See Control (workflow). Record To be able to playback something it has to be recorded.
PAGE 61
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Patch by channel Patch by channel is easy and fast in the Output editor. It can be done live or blind. You can start with a cleared patch or with a 1:1 patch. See Patch by Channel/Dimmer. Patch by dimmer Patch by dimmer is easy and fast in the Output Editor. It can be done live or blind. You can start with a cleared patch or with a 1:1 patch. See Patch by Channel/Dimmer. NOTE To clear the Patch, see the Patch Wizard. To get an overview of the current patch, see the Channels List.
PAGE 62
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 The structure is simple • • Press a key Hold a key and press another key. When a number is required, simply enter it before either of the key combinations above. See Channels - Command Syntax. Channel "handles" Regardless if a lighting instrument is a conventional light, or some kind of moving device, the intensity function of this device is assigned a unique Channel number in the patch.
PAGE 63
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 What is recorded? Intensities The default setting is that all intensities on stage are stored. Conventional lights and moving devices alike. Moving Devices Before you start recording moving devices, you need to make two decisions in the default settings for attributes (parameters). • • What parameters do I want to record? (active (default), changed, popup, all, ). See Device Recording - Modes. How do I want parameters to be executed? (Auto Mark (default), On Go, In B).
PAGE 64
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • Sequences Console keys See Masters. Playing back Presets and the main sequence. • • As soon as a preset is recorded you can play it back in the Main Playback or any of the 80 Master Playbacks. See Presets - Load To Playbacks. All presets that have been recorded in Live have been added to the Sequence of the Main Playback as Steps with default fade times (5s). They can be played back with or without this default time, or manually. See Main Playback.
PAGE 65
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Groups • Channels, intensities and text is edited in the Groups list. See Groups - List. Presets • • Intensities, text and FCB timing data are edited in the Preset List. See Preset - List. Attributes and individual attribute times are edited in the Preset Attribute editor. See Device Views - Presets. Sequences • • • • Presets, In/Out/Delay/Wait times, text, Attribute Move, Time Code, Macros and Notes are edited in the Sequence editor. See Sequences - Sequence List.
PAGE 66
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Troubleshooting When you run into a problem with this system there are few probable reasons (system hardware, system software, operating issue, surrounding equipment).
PAGE 67
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Troubleshooting - FAQ Here are some situations that you may run into. If these don't solve the issue, contact support at ETC Technical Services 24/7. Troubleshooting - Console Keys do not respond Console is not responding to key presses If a key gets mechanically stuck it will seem like the console is not responding - however mouse and keyboard will still work. • Try pressing ESC twice and test again.
PAGE 68
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • Check termination by connecting device directly to a DMX output with no other devices connected. Troubleshooting - External Touchscreen Touching one selects something on the other screen. Touchscreens can't match the touch and screen automatically, they have to be told which is which. • Recalibrate and ensure to select the right screen. Troubleshooting - Backup is not in sync The backup isn't following the server.
PAGE 69
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Troubleshooting - Crashes & Bugs All software-based products run the risk of a crash regardless of testing procedures. In the unlikely event it happens, please help us to eliminate problems with crashes and bugs by reporting them to us. To make it easier and faster to solve problems with the Cobalt software, it is important that problems are reported in a proper and complete way. First, it is important to define what a Crash means.
PAGE 70
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 If we get this information from the start, it makes it easier for us to provide a fast and professional service. What to do after a crash? In most cases your play will have been saved (recover.asc). In this case you got a popup explaining this and returned to the login screen. • Log in again. If you don't return to the login screen, which is extremely unlikely you need to restart the console. • • • Press Esc if the front panel seems frozen.
PAGE 71
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 2. Open the Browser and select "Copy Log files to USB" 3. Mail both files (log & dmp) to Cobalt@etcconnect.com NOTE This has to be done directly. The dmp file is a temporary file that will be overwritten if anything happens later. BOTH files are needed to solve the problem. Thank you for your help.
PAGE 72
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Troubleshooting - Reset There is a hard power switch in the back of the console and a soft power switch in the top right corner of the frontpanel. To make a soft reset, hold the power key in the top right corner of the frontpanel for five seconds. In order to reset the console completely, turn off the power, count to five and then turn back on.
PAGE 73
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Troubleshooting - Help from ETC Technical Services Emergency service is available from all ETC offices outside of normal business hours. If you are having difficulties, your most convenient resources are the references given in this manual and the Help system. To search more widely, try the ETC website at www.etcconnect.com/community. If none of these resources is sufficient, contact ETC Technical Services directly at one of the offices identified below.
PAGE 74
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 GENERAL FUNCTIONS These are important functions that apply in general and don't belong to a specific chapter or node of the Browser.
PAGE 75
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Cobalt Console Facepanel 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
PAGE 76
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Programming Section This is where most of the programming is done. Numerical entries, opening editors, recording and setting times. Some of the areas are grouped by functionality and sometimes referred to in this help system. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
PAGE 77
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Cobalt Screens Cobalt systems can support three external monitors/touch screens besides the two built in touch screens. In addition to this each section of five master playbacks share a smaller touch screen. Screens can be navigated with tap and gestures, mouse and console keys. • • A status bar is available at the top of all screens. All screens can have four dock areas.
PAGE 78
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Main screen area for tabs Tab title area Tab settings Info area about selected tab or channel Software version Numerical input Level of currently selected channel Channel control - which field channels are controlled in currently Message field for system warnings/information Dock header for the bottom dock area Output status indications Screen 2 The main difference are these two areas: 1. 2.
PAGE 79
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Soft Key Pages In the lower right corner of screen 2 there are soft key pages. This is the top level. When there are functions "under" a soft key, it will be bold, lika all are on this level. The back arrow will bring you one level back "up" to the top level, from wherever you are.
PAGE 80
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 The Browser Press BROWSER to select the Browser dock. The Browser dock gives you direct access to all functions and data in Cobalt.
PAGE 81
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Browser Controls Action Key Feedback Select the Browser [BROWSER] The Browser is focused. Press again to close or open it. Move up/down in a list [Arrow_Keys] Up and down arrows move in all open lists. Open a sublist [Right_Arrow] The right arrow opens a sublist under a closed node. Jump to top sublist [Left_Arrow] The left arrow jumps to the top of a sublist, and closes that node if pressed again.
PAGE 82
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Browser Functions - LOAD Use MODIFY and LOAD to activate selected items from the lists in the Browser. Action Key Feedback Open an editor [MODIFY] Opens the editor of the object selected in the Browser. Load a Group [LOAD] Loads the selected Group to the active Channel View. Activate a palette [LOAD] Activates palette # for the selected channel(s).
PAGE 83
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Tabs Press TAB to select and step through all open tabs. All data and editors are opened in a tab. Tabs are always opened in the middle area of the selected screen. Two tabs are never closed: LIVE and MAIN PLAYBACK. 1. Tab header • • Touch a tab to activate. Every tab is assigned a number when opened. # TAB selects this tab. 2. Tab header context menu • • • Split screen/full screen Tab parameter setup Tab help 3.
PAGE 84
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • All tabs can be locked (See Tab Setup & Lock) Include Channel View in Pool: See Live - Live Tab. Auto close tab mode In Cobalt Console Settings you can activate a mode that will close the previous tab when a new tab is opened, to keep down the number of tabs at all times. See Console Settings..
PAGE 85
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Include Channel View in Pool refers only to Live Views. See Live - Live Tab. Split/Full Screen You can split a tab view horisontally/vertically by holding TAB and pressing the down/up arrow. There is also a context menu for this if you tap and hold on the tab header. Select Split screen repeatedly to toggle vertical/horisontal.
PAGE 86
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 87
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Editors And Lists Most editors are lists. Some have a channel view on top that works just like any channel view. The list part works pretty much like a standard spreadsheet application. 1. 2. 3.
PAGE 88
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 89
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sort By Column Function Key Feedback Sort from low to high [COLUMN] & [Up_Arrow] The list is sorted by this column from low to high.* Sort from high to low [COLUMN] & [Down_Arrow] The list is sorted by this column from high to low.* * These changes are temporary, they will be lost if the tab is closed and opened again.
PAGE 90
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Drag and Drop In most places of the Cobalt screen interface you can use a mouse or trackball to drag content to other locations and drop there. This is the same as doing a copy/paste or cut/paste command with key presses. Please note that there are two options for drag-and-drop editing within Cobalt - editing within the same play and using drag/drop to import data from another play - this can be an older version of the current play to perform UNDO actions, or another play entirely.
PAGE 91
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dragging a preset from the Browser to Live 1. Click, hold and drag a preset from the Browser to Live. 2. Drop over Live - the content in Live will be replaced by the levels of the channels in that Preset. NOTE There is no warning, the content of Live will be replaced by the intensity content of the Preset dropped.
PAGE 92
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dragging sequence steps 1. Open the main playback Sequence Editor (MODIFY and PLAYBACK). 2. Click, hold and drag a sequence step to another sequence step, then drop.
PAGE 93
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 3. You will now get a dialogue with the following options: This dialogue allows you to COPY or MOVE the selected step. COPY = Makes a copy of the source and inserts it into the sequence after the target step. MOVE = Moves the source and inserts it into the sequence after the target step.
PAGE 94
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 If you select the Advanced tab by pressing left arrow, you get the following options: The first option allows you to define where you want to copy/move the step to. • • • After the target step (default) Before the target step Replace the target step The second option "Create Between" allows you to create a new step with a new preset number and insert (after/before). NOTE For more info, see: Sequence - drag and drop data.
PAGE 95
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Drag and Drop - Replacing Data If you drag a Sequence, Preset or Palette and drop it on another node of the same kind, you will get the option of replacing the node you are dropping data on. This feature works both within the same play and in the Import From Organizer.
PAGE 96
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 97
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Context Menus Press LOCAL MENU to open a context menu for the focused screen/object. In most places of the Cobalt screen interface there is a context sensitive menu that offers the functions that apply most to the part of the interface you have focused at the moment. It is opened by pressing SELECT twice, or by right clicking with a mouse or trackball.
PAGE 98
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 99
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 100
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dialogues All dialogues are opened on the currently focused screen. Example of Record dialogue • • • • • • • To close a dialogue press ESC. To change dialogue tab, use the right/left arrows. To change settings use the up/down arrows to navigate inside a tab. Press MODIFY to open a dropdown menu. Enter a number and press MODIFY for numerical entries. Press MODIFY to toggle a checkbox option. To enter a text, press MODIFY to activate text entry, enter text, press MODIFY to terminate.
PAGE 101
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Power-up Procedure For best performance, power-up your system in the following order. No output will be sent until the startup show file has been loaded. Action Hardware Feedback 1. Turn on external hub(s) or switch(es) Power switches 2. Turn on the console and monitor(s) Power and/or reset switch on console and monitors. The displays will light up with the Cobalt logo. The screens will load the login screen. 3.
PAGE 102
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Reset The System When you open a new (empty) Play, you can choose to set the patch 1:1. This chapter is a checklist for resetting the frontpanel and checking the output. This chapter contains the following sections • • Reset The Console Facepanel Check The Output Before you start, make sure you have loaded a new (empty) Play. See Load a New (empty) Play Reset The Console Facepanel To get light you have to make sure the console is reset properly. Output mode and Grand Master.
PAGE 103
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Main Playback crossfaders (bottom right corner of the console). Action Console Feedback 2. Reset the crossfaders by moving the up and back down A/B faders to bottom position Check The Output After loading a new Play the patch is set 1:1 and the output protocol will be set to DMX512 on both output connectors in the back of the console. If you enter a number and move the level wheel, a dimmer should respond - providing there is one connected.
PAGE 104
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Bypass Startup Screen It's possible to set the system to boot directly into the lighting control software - without having to pass the login screen. This was designed for backup systems and Light Servers so that they can self-boot, and it may be desirable also for a normal situation where the system settings are not needed at power-up.
PAGE 105
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Output Control The Grand Master and the three-position switch in the top right corner of the console facepanel offer output control that overrides every output from the console. The "ON" Position in the middle is the default mode for normal operation of the console. Grand Master The Grand Master is located in the top right corner of the console facepanel.
PAGE 106
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 B.O. Mode A Black Out will take out all intensities. Action Feedback B.O. A Black Out of all intensity outputs, except those controlled by the Independents in Exclusive mode. A red B.O. Indication will appear on the top of all screens. Freeze Mode When the Output Mode switch is set to FREEZE, the output is "frozen" and will remain static until the switch is set back to ON. When the switch is set back to ON the output is loaded to the A field of the Main Playback.
PAGE 107
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Copy, Cut & Paste The COPY/CUT and PASTE keys in the programming section are general keys, and can be used to cut and paste for example Sequence Steps, Groups, Presets and Device Templates. Action Key Feedback Copy [COPY/CUT] The currently selected object is copied. Cut [COPY/CUT] [COPY/CUT] The currently selected object (devices excluded) is cut. Paste [PASTE] The last copied or cut object is pasted.
PAGE 108
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Entering Texts Almost every item in a Play can be labeled with a text. The texts are entered from a keyboard, and there is a special TEXT key that can be used to quickly edit the text of a Sequence Step, or a Preset/Group in a Master. Numbers and decimal point can be entered from the numerical keypad of the console(s). IMPORTANT NOTE If you have an external keyboard with a NUM LOCK key connected you have to activate NUM LOCK for the numerical keypad in Cobalt to work.
PAGE 109
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Mute & Solo Mute & Solo allow you to treat all Playbacks (masters and Main Playback) as you would in a sound console - being able to temporarily Mute or Solo the content of any Playback. • • Muting a Playback will temporarily stop all output from this Playback without changing data or fader level. Soloing a Playback will temporarily mute all Playbacks except this one, without changing data or fader levels. In effect this is the same functionality that is found in a sound console.
PAGE 110
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Mute & Solo - MUTE Mute is a Soft Key.
PAGE 111
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Hold MUTE and press a Playback key to activate/deactivate. Function Key Feedback Mute a Master plabyack # [MUTE] & [Master_key] The Muted status is indicated in the Master Display of the console and in the Master View. Mute Main Playback [MUTE] & [PLAYBACK] The Mute status is indicated in the Playback tab. Un-mute a Master playback [MUTE] & # [Master_key] The master is no longer muted. Un-mute Main Playback [MUTE] & [PLAYBACK] The main playback is no longer muted.
PAGE 112
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Mute & Solo - SOLO SOLO is a Soft Key. Hold SOLO and press a Playback key to activate/deactivate.
PAGE 113
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Function Key Feedback Solo a Master playback # [SOLO] & [Master_key] The Solo status is indicated in the Master Display of the console and in the Master View. Solo Main Playback [SOLO] & [PLAYBACK] The Solo status is indicated in the Playback tab. Un-solo a Master playback # [SOLO] & [Master_key] The master is no longer soloed. Un-solo Main Playback [SOLO] & [PLAYBACK] The main playback is no longer soloed.
PAGE 114
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Lock Console Press LOCK in the programming section to lock the console, enter a pin code to lock and unlock. The following mouse actions are blocked • • • Screen actions from layouts Drag and drop Double clicking in editors.
PAGE 115
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Misc Soft Key Page The Miscellaneous Soft Key Page is selected with the soft key MISC.
PAGE 116
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Function Softkey Feedback Play back Macro # [#] [Macro] Macro # is played back.. See MACROS. Learn Macro # [#] [Learn_Macro] Macro # is recorded. See MACROS. Print Screen [Print_Screen] Prints the current screen to a node called PRINTOUTS. See Print. Playlist mode [Playlist] The Playlist is activated. See The Playlist. UnPark [UnPark] Is used in combination with other keys to unpark channel values. See Park.
PAGE 117
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Cleaning the Cobalt Console Do not spray liquids directly onto the screens or console facepanel! Clean the touch screens with a microfiber cloth or with a lint-free cloth dampened with glass cleaner. The metal facepanel and wrist rest may be dusted with a microfiber cloth or with a lint-free cloth dampened with glass cleaner. The metal surface of the console has an anodized treatment that is durable and scratch resistant.
PAGE 118
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 About The About node shows you a summary of the system and a summary of the currently loaded play. About Node This chapter contains the following sections • • About - Cobalt... About - Play...
PAGE 119
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 About - Cobalt About Cobalt shows you a summary of your system configuration - this information is often only used in case of technical support. SOFTWARE AND OUTPUTS • • • • • • • Software Version: The version and revision of the Cobalt software installed. Qt Library: Qt is a supporting tool that is used by Cobalt. Only for support. Dongle number: This is your unique software number that is required when you upgrade your system size.
PAGE 120
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 ROLE • • • Possible roles: These are the possible roles your dongle permits: Server, Backup and/or Client. Name: System name Current Role: The currently active role NETWORKING • • • • • Net: The logical network this console is active on. IP: IP address of this system. Enabled network protocols: A summary of enabled protocols and the current Universe Map for each of them. Network DMX input: Shows if this is active.
PAGE 121
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 About - Play This is a summary of your play. The same information is included in your printouts.
PAGE 122
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dimmer/Device Feedback Log The Dimmer/Device feedback log (Browser >About) will show all logged dimmer feedback messages from: • • • • • RDM CEM3 FDX CEM+ Dimstat Features • • • The Active column shows if the error is active or if it has been cleared. You can also reset a known error (to get rid of the indication on the channel) by toggling the Active field. Select one or more rows in the Dimmer Feedback Log and press DELETE to remove them from the list.
PAGE 123
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 In the Header bar on top of the screens, the warning sign indicator will show dimmer and/or other faults in the format: General Errors/Dimmer Errors. Active errors are marked with red. A column “Type” will show the source of the error.
PAGE 124
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sensor3 & Sensor+ Dimmer Feedback These devices will show up in the “Net3/ACN Device List” (Browser >General Settings >Network >Net3/ACN Device List). Channel Display When a channel is patched to an output that is associated with a Sensor3 or Sensor+ dimmer then that channel will indicate the state of that dimmer. When the associated dimmer has an error or warning then the channel display will include a small warning sign as part of the display.
PAGE 125
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Files The files node is where you can open, save, export and import show files. You can also save a default show, copy log files to a USB memory - and exit the system. Files Node This chapter contains the following sections • • • • • • • • • • • Files - Introduction New Open Save & Save as... Import from...
PAGE 126
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Files - Introduction Make sure you save your information at all times. If the current Play has been altered since it was last saved, the name is displayed in yellow instead of white. If over 30 minutes have passed without saving, the time stamp will turn red. All file handling can be done from the File node (BROWSER >File). There is a SAVE and SAVE TO key in the frontpanel. This system has a hard drive as the primary storage.
PAGE 127
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE USB memory is the main external storage media. If you insert a USB device which contains Image or Movie files, you get a question about auto importing them to the Images and Movies folders. The Floppy drive is mainly an interface for importing shows from other systems using floppy such as Pronto, Safari, Expression, Strand 500-series etc. If your system does not have a floppy drive, connect one with USB or move the files to a USB memory stick.
PAGE 128
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 New When you want to clear the console to start with a new play, you use the "New" command (Browser >Files >New). Function Key Feedback 1. Select the Browser [BROWSER] The Browser is selected on the left side of screen 1. If the Browser already was selected - it will be closed. Press Browser again to reopen. 2. Go to "Files" at the top Arrow keys Files is marked in orange 3. Open the File node Right arrow Opens a subtree of functions. 4.
PAGE 129
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 130
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 New Play Patch Options These are the most important settings that you need to consider when starting a new Play in Cobalt. First there is a dialogue asking you about the patch options for the new play. There is an option to use a default patch, a channel-to-dimmer patch 1:1, to start with No patch. See Patch.
PAGE 131
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Then there will be a dialogue asking you to select the most important settings for the new play General Settings These settings affect default times and master recording in Live. • Set times to - Options are A and B to set which sequence step will receive timing commands made Live. See Sequences - Times.
PAGE 132
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • Enable Remote Controls - When checked, allows remote controls to interact with the lighting system. See Play Settings - System. • Default Go Time - Sets the time used by sequence steps with no other recorded timing data. See Play Settings - Crossfade. • Default out Time - Sets the out-fade time to be recorded to sequence steps. See Play Settings - Crossfade. • Default In Time - Sets the in-fade time to be recorded to sequence steps. See Play Settings - Crossfade.
PAGE 133
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Open When you want to open a play, you use the "Open..." command (Browser >Files >Open). Function Key Feedback 1. Select the Browser [BROWSER] The Browser is selected on the left side of screen 1* 2. Go to "Files" at the top Arrow keys Files is marked in orange 3. Open the File node Right arrow Opens a subtree of functions. 4. Select "Open" Down arrow Open is highlighted. 5. Open this node Right arrow Opens a subtree of media choices. 6.
PAGE 134
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Save & Save as... Press SAVE to save the play. You can also press CTRL-S on a keyboard.
PAGE 135
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 *It is possible to set up a file server by specifying the file server path in the Login Settings. See Login Settings, General Functions. To save using the Files node in the Browser: Function Key Feedback 1. Open the Browser [BROWSER] If it was already selected it will be closed. Press again to open. 2. Go to Files Down Arrow Files is highlighted 3. Expand subnodes Right arrow Subnodes are expanded. 4. Select Save as Down Arrow "Save as..." is highlighted 5.
PAGE 136
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Creating Subfolders For Files You can create sub-folders for files with the INSERT command in the context menu (press SELECT SELECT or the INSERT console key) for the Play Archive node in Browser >File >Save as... >Play Archive. Delete a Play You can delete a Play file by selecting it in the browser and pressing DELETE.
PAGE 137
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Save Copy to... Press SAVE COPY in the programming section to save a copy of the play directly to a USB memory stick or file server. For example, this can be used to create a backup copy of the show. BROWSER >Files >Save Copy. Simply connect your USB memory stick and select this option. NOTE You have the option of saving revisions 1-9 of a play every time you store it with the same name on the same USB memory if you use the Save... option to save to USB.
PAGE 138
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Import from... You can import part of any play into your current play, if you want to reuse color palettes, presets, groups or if you want to reload a previous version of an object such as a preset from an earlier version of the same play. You can also import lists from Excel, LightWright or WYSIWYG. See Channel Database - Import Text File Wizard. This chapter describes the import functions. Parts about drag and drop are referred to the chapter about Drag and Drop. See Drag and Drop.
PAGE 139
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Import Organizer - Functions The basic functionality of the Import Organizer is that you can use drag and drop (mouse) or copy and paste (keys) to copy any type of data from an external play to the one in memory. Importing single items When you want to import a single item you have a choice of using drag and drop, or the copy/paste function. Drag & Drop 1. 2. 3. Click and hold on the single item you want to import in the Organizer (import from) tab.
PAGE 140
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Importing multiple items When you want to import multiple items, you do it in the exact same way as when importing single items. The difference is in how you select which items to import. Select the top node to import all items of the same kind, like Sequence, Presets, Groups etc... Hold SHIFT (keyboard) or SELECT and click to select a range of multiple items of the same kind. Hold SELECT and use arrows in console.
PAGE 141
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Import - Types of items to import Here are some examples of items that can be imported from any play to the one in memory using the import function: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Sequences Sequence steps Channel Times Device Links Master Links Action Macros Presets Groups Palettes Templates Patch Devices Effects Master Pages Scroller Rolls Channel Layouts Import Items With Dependencies Many items in a Play are dependent on other items.
PAGE 142
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 143
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 And after this you will get a dialogue confirming the dependencies that have been imported as well.
PAGE 144
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Import From Other Lighting Control Systems Importing a show from another lighting system is easy, as long as it is saved in the Standard ASCII Light Cues format. Basically the easiest way to get the information into Cobalt is to 1. 2. 3. Open the play - any play in Standard ASCII Light Cues format (name.asc or name.alq) can be opened directly. Save the play as a normal Cobalt play. Use the import Organizer in this chapter to import parts of these plays.
PAGE 145
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Submaster content If a submaster contained attributes on the Strand system, the attributes are not transferred to Cobalt, only the intensities. Palette references In the Strand system, attribute information stored in groups can be used as palettes and referred to in presets. Strand groups that are referenced from presets are converted to All Palettes and a reference to the palette is stored in the Cobalt Preset.
PAGE 146
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Import from Avab Expert Expert plays can be read directly from a floppy drive or as ASCII plays from a USB, See local manual for export instructions to this format. The way Expert plays are read has changed completely to be able to read more data. Using an external utility, the Expert binary file format is translated into ASCII Light Cues and opened just like any other file. • • Loading an Expert play is done from Browser >File >Open. When a diskette with an Expert.
PAGE 147
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Export to Expert diskette This option allows you to export the current play to a floppy disc in Avab Expert play format. 1. 2. 3.
PAGE 148
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Default Play wizard The Default PlayWizard allows you to store various parts of your current show as a default file. The data in the default file will be offered when you start with a New Play. Remember that it is easy to create a default play using the Import Organizer to pull in data from other plays.
PAGE 149
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 150
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Print You can print play data to pdf files, sorted in different ways and in different formats. These files are copied to a USB memory and printed from any standard computer. Patch and Channel Database can be exported to a comma separated text file, suitable for spreadsheet or database programs like Excel. Channel Layouts are printed separately from the Channel Layout editor. Screens can be printed with the PRINT SCREEN function in the Misc Soft Key Menu. 1.
PAGE 151
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • • • • • • • Sequences Presets Groups Palettes Device List Channel Database (only those with texts) Channel List (only patched channels) Output List (only patched outputs) 3. Choose if you want to include attributes or not. 4. Choose if you want to sort by Channel, by level or by difference. 5. Choose if you want to print All channels or just those that are changed (more compact). 6.
PAGE 152
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Copy Log files to USB This function will copy the log files that are automatically stored in case of a program termination to a USB memory so you can email them to ETC for analysis. 1. 2.
PAGE 153
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Exit to System Settings The System Settings is where you configure time, nationality, output, network, protocols and software update/upgrade. The Cobalt System Settings are opened from the Welcome Screen, or from the Browser (Browser >Files >Exit To System Settings). If you start an offline system all of the options will not be available, since they relate to the hardware of a console.
PAGE 154
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 System Settings - General These are the general System Settings. System Name This specifies the name this Cobalt console will use to identify itself on the network to other devices. It is displayed at the top of each screen. Time & Date Set time and date for this system. Preferred Language Select a language with MODIFY and confirm with MODIFY. Preferred Help Language Select a language with MODIFY and confirm with MODIFY.
PAGE 155
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 \\anders\playfolder (external server name/folder) \\192.168.1.1\plays (external IPaddress/folder) Inverse LCD Inverts the colors for the Master and Direct Select LCD's in the console facepanel. Channel Downgrade Reduces the number of control channels in a system. Default is 1,024 channels, but this may be increased to 3,072 on any Cobalt system. Swap 0 & C Swap the physical location of the numerical keypads 0 and C buttons (do so in the console as well physically).
PAGE 156
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 System Settings - Com Port This is used to set up the COM port(s) of your Congo Jr or Cobalt Light Server system. This has to be defined if you are communicating to an external device through the serial port OR if you are using an older TT Radio Remote. Consult the manual of your device for the required settings of the serial port. Please observe that you cannot use the same serial port for radio remote and trigger devices at the same time.
PAGE 157
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 System Settings - Universe Map Each server in a multiple server system requires a logical network of it's own. There are ten networks, 0-9. In each of these networks you can set a name, and the EDMX, sACN and Artnet mapping. In a setup with several systems in the same network, such as for example a television studio, you can assign names to the networks belonging to each studio. When the system is started these names will appear in the top right corner of the Welcome screen.
PAGE 158
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 System Settings - Output These are the settings for the DMX outputs of the consoles, and ethernet to visualizers. Visualizer Link Activates bi-directional communication with third party visualisation tools. NOTE When the software is started in Offline mode there is no DMX output. DMX SETTINGS Local DMX Output Set the start output and output speed for the DMX outputs of the consoles.
PAGE 159
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 System Settings - Backup These are settings mostly used in a Server/Backup situation, although some options may be interesting in a single Server system as well. BACKUP MODE Sets start mode of your choice for this system. • • • Always Server Always Backup Server/Backup depends on startup order ALWAYS START UP WITH SPECIFIC PLAY FILE Select any play file to be auto-loaded at startup, skipping the startup screen. Suitable for museum and event applications.
PAGE 160
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 System Settings - Network These are specific network settings for Net3 services and IP settings. Network Adapter This will say Online if a network is detected, otherwise it will say Offline. NET3 SERVICES Net3 Services are a suite of services that provide infrastructure support for a Net3/ACN network. Those services are a dynamic IP address server, a network time server and a file server. Each of these services are described below.
PAGE 161
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Address Service (DHCP) Net3 Services uses a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) address server. DHCP is a TCP/IP protocol that dynamically assigns an IP address to a network device when it requests one. This is a small and simple DHCP server that is intended to be used on non-routed networks. It will not serve IP addresses across a router. CAUTION: There should only be a single DHCP server active on a network.
PAGE 162
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 IP SETTINGS These are the settings that determine the method to get an IP address and/or the actual IP address information that Cobalt uses for network communication. Preferred IP address This tells Cobalt which network adapter it should use for communication with the lighting system. In consoles and Light Servers, there is only one network adapter so the Automatic (default) setting is fine.
PAGE 163
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 by the console (whether it is served via DHCP or a self-generated link-local IP address). Network - Console • Obtain an IP Automatically - Clicking in the enable box will set Cobalt to get its IP address dynamically from a DHCP server. While the console is starting, it will ask for an IP address from a DHCP server. If one responds, it will use the assigned IP address. If no DHCP server is available, Cobalt will default to a self-generated link-local IP address in the range of 169.
PAGE 164
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Default Gateway: 10.101.1.1 This addressing scheme should allow a Cobalt console to communicate with other ETC equipment via Ethernet without requiring any changes to these settings. If more than one Cobalt console of the same type are to be connected to the network, ensure that the default addressing has been changed on consoles #2 and above. Default IPs for all Cobalt family products 10.101.84.101 (Cobalt 20 console) 10.101.82.101 (Congo/Cobalt Light Server) 10.101.79.
PAGE 165
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 ETCNet2 Activate if you are using any ETCNet2 nodes. The system name that is exposed on Net2 is “Cobalt “ + the system name. • ETCNet2 Priority: An ETCNet2 source can have a priority of 20-1. 1 is highest, and 20 is lowest. This parameter decides the priority status of this system if there are multiple sources (for example Cobalt and Unison). Sources with the same priority share on an HTP level. If there are different priorities, the highest one will "win". See ETCNet2 documentation.
PAGE 166
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Network - DCHP Service Net3 Services uses a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) address server. DHCP is a TCP/IP protocol that dynamically assigns an IP address to a network device when it requests one. This is a small and simple DHCP server that is intended to be used on non-routed networks. It will not serve IP addresses across a router. CAUTION: There should only be a single DHCP server active on a network.
PAGE 167
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Network - Update Service • Update Service (TFTP) Clicking in the enable box will start the TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) server. • Update File Path - This sets the directory where network device firmware files are to be served through TFTP. This must be the full path to the directory, including internal drive letter. The default is: C:\etc\nodesbin Network - Time Service • Time Service (SNTP) Enabling this starts the SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) service.
PAGE 168
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Network Configuration Applications This is where you can configure your Net3 Gateways and ETC Networks. To be able to configure nodes from the console NCE and/or GCE have to be installed. Download the latest GCE from the ETC website, put it on a USB stick in the same folder as Cobalt installers and install it in the same way as you update the Cobalt software. Please check the corresponding manuals for these products.
PAGE 169
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 System Settings - Monitor System Settings - Monitor Max physical monitors Select the number of physical monitors you want to run your system with. If you are running an offline version you can choose virtual screens. Monitor 1 Check this enable box to change Placement (left/middle/right) or Mode (resolution). Monitor 2 Check this enable box to change Placement (left/middle/right) or Mode (resolution).
PAGE 170
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Identify Click here to identify all monitors with a number. Apply Click here to apply the current monitor settings with a time-out option to return to the previous settings.
PAGE 171
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 System Settings - Update You can update software, and upgrade the number of outputs your system supports. • • To update the software you need a USB memory stick with the latest congo.exe file from www.etcconnect.com that is inserted in a USB port before activating this tab. To upgrade the outputs you need an upgrade code from your ETC retailer.
PAGE 172
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Update Software In a Congo Jr or Server you will need a mouse to do this. In the big Cobalt you can use the trackball. Function Action Feedback 1. Download latest software www.etcconnect.com Save the file "congo.exe" on a USB memory stick 2. Put USB in Cobalt - 3. Exit to Settings "Exit to System Settings" node in the browser 4. Go to Update click on Update 5. Select software in dropdown click on Software Update dropdown 6. Select INSTALL click on INSTALL 7.
PAGE 173
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 System Settings - USB RFR You can set HF (frequency) and Network ID (group) for each RFR remote. Simply make sure they correspond to your remote settings. You can also update the firmware of your RFR base unit and remote. For more information see Remote Control - RFR Radio Remote. For the remote to work both base station and console need to be set to the same HF and Network ID.
PAGE 174
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 System Settings - Utilities These are some useful utilities for file handling.
PAGE 175
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 FILE MANAGER This opens a file manager utility for copying and/or moving files between Cobalt and a USB memory or file server. BACKUP SHOW ARCHIVE Will copy all shows in the archive including backup plays to a USB memory.
PAGE 176
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 VERIFY HARD DISK Technical Services request that you do this as part of fault-finding. Select the appropriate drive letter and click START.. BACKUP SETTINGS Creates a backup of your console settings in case you need to reimage the system. RESTORE SETTINGS Allows you to restore settings from a backup.
PAGE 177
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Exit to Welcome Screen Press MODIFY to exit to the Welcome Screen. From here you can start as Server, Backup or Offline. You can open System Settings and Quit. In the message box you will be notified • • If there are Cobalts with different software versions running on the same network. If the same sACN or Net2 universe is mapped to multiple Cobalt universes. 1. In the top left corner you will see if there are multiple user setups, for example for different tv-studios.
PAGE 178
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Power Off (Quit) Always shut down your system correctly with the Exit function (BROWSER >File >Power Off). Function Key Feedback 1. Open the Browser [BROWSER] If it was already selected it will be closed. Press again to open. 2. Go to Files Down Arrow Files is highlighted 3. Open subnodes Right arrow Subnodes are opened 4. Select Power Off Down Arrow Power Off is highlighted 5. Confirm Power Off [MODIFY] You will get a popup asking you to confirm, and exit the system.
PAGE 179
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 General Settings The General Settings node contains all the settings for the play, the console, networking, printing, dock areas etc. General Settings Node This chapter contains the following sections • • • • • • • • • • Play Settings Console Settings DMX Settings Network Print Wizard Screens (5.
PAGE 180
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Play Settings The Settings define default times and values, the behaviour of recording functions, and attribute behaviour in faders during playback.
PAGE 181
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Play Settings - Introduction Press SETUP in the programming section to open system settings. You can also open a local settings popup for any key by holding SETUP and pressing that key (for example GO or RECORD) The system settings popup contains the following sections • • • • • • • • • LETS BEGIN >A summary of the most important settings. CHANNELS >Configure default values and select Command Syntax. CROSSFADE >Configure default times, fader modes and fade direction.
PAGE 182
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Play Settings - Basic The "Let's Begin" settings are a cross selection of settings from all tabs that are very important to fill in before starting to work with a new show. See New.
PAGE 183
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Play Settings - Channels Press SETUP and use the right/left arrows to select the Channel Settings tab. • • Use the down arrow to select a cell. Use MODIFY or # MODIFY to change values.
PAGE 184
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Settings The Channel Settings are general for all Channel Views.
PAGE 185
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Play Settings - Crossfade Press SETUP and use the right/left arrows to select the Crossfade Settings tab. • • Use the down arrow to select a cell. Use MODIFY or # MODIFY to change values.
PAGE 186
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Crossfade Settings The Crossfade Settings are general for the Main Playback. Timing settings Function Explanation Default value Default GO Time The Time used by the GO key when no times have been assigned to a crossfade 5 Default Go Back Time The Time used by the GO BACK key when pressed independent of any ongoing fades.
PAGE 187
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Specific playback settings Function Explanation Default value Disable PB Rubberband Disables attributes from the faders of the Main Playback. Off Always start Dynamics on Sets Dynamics to start on Go regardless of Go other settings. Off Don't loop Sequence At the end of a Sequence it will not restart at Off step 1. Don't advance Playback Crossfades will not advance any sequence steps automatically. Off Show sequence numbers Display of Sequence Steps in the Playback tab.
PAGE 188
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Play Settings - Master These are the global settings for the whole play. There are a lot of individual master settings as well. (See Masters - Settings) Press SETUP and use the right/left arrows to select the Master Settings tab. • • Use the down arrow to select a cell. Use MODIFY to toggle a setting.
PAGE 189
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Settings The Master Settings are general for the Master Playbacks. Function Explanation Auto-Update master page Changes to a Master Page are stored On automatically. Exclude Int. from Record (6.1) Excludes all master intensities from Off record actions in Live Enable Flash key (6.1) Enables Flash mode to momentary On (on) in all consoles and wing panels with physical flash keys.
PAGE 190
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Play Settings - Effects These are global effect settings for the whole play. Press SETUP and use the right/left arrows to select the Effects Settings tab. • • Use the down arrow to select "Remember Effect Parameters" Use MODIFY to toggle on/off. The default value is on. When this is set to "on" all live effect parameters are stored and recalled when you shut down the system, regardless if they are stored into palettes or presets or not.
PAGE 191
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Play Settings - System Press SETUP and use the right/left arrows to select the System Settings tab. • • Use the down arrow to select a cell. Use MODIFY to toggle a setting.
PAGE 192
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 System Settings The System Settings are general for the behaviour of the console. Function Explanation Default value Beep An audio "beep" warning when illegal commands are performed AND when a crossfade is completed On Remote Control Activate Radio remote focus units and remote trigger. On Auto-save on Record Saves the Play after each time you Off press RECORD. Caution, this can take some time with large play files.
PAGE 193
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Play Settings - Attribute Press SETUP and use the right/left arrows to select the Attribute Settings tab. • • Use the down arrow to select a cell. Use MODIFY or # MODIFY to change values.
PAGE 194
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Attribute Settings The Attribute settings affect recording and control of moving device parameters. Recording and control functions Function Explanation Default Sequence attribute playback default Record attributes to move "live" (GoOnGo), when the positions are loaded for the next Crossfade (GoInB) or Auto Move. Auto Mark* Record Attribute mode There are different modes for Active recording Attributes. See Device Recording - Modes. See Attrib Move in Sequence List - Functions.
PAGE 195
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Time settings Function Explanation Default F-Del A default delay time in seconds or % (of the In time), used when recording Preset with Attributes. 0 seconds C-Del See above 0 seconds B-Del See above 0 seconds F-Time A default time in seconds or % (of the In time), used when recording Preset with Attributes.
PAGE 196
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Play Settings - MIDI Press SETUP and use the right/left arrows to select the MIDI Settings tab. • • Use the down arrow to select a cell. Use MODIFY or # MODIFY to change values.
PAGE 197
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Standard MIDI All keys and faders can send notes and controllers when this is activated in the MIDI Settings.You can use MIDI notes and controllers to remote control any key or fader of the Console.The Cobalt can also be set to activate a specific crossfade when receiving a Program Change command through MIDI. See MIDI. Function Explanation Default value Direct mode Midi Direct Mode On MIDI Channel The MIDI channel used by Cobalt 1 Keys All keys are sent as notes.
PAGE 198
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Direct Mode MIDI Direct Mode is designed to allow you to connect any MIDI equipment to Cobalt and be able to make it work, providing it is sending the corresponding MIDI commands.
PAGE 199
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 MIDI - Direct playback mode Speed Control A, B 1 102 GrandMaster 1 104 Independent 1-6 1 110 Page, block 1 1 0-127 128 Page, block 2 2 0-127 128 Page, block 3 3 0-127 128 Page, block 4 4 0-127 128 Jump in main playback 5 0-127 128 103 2 1 115 6 Program Change MSC Extend to allow control of all masters.
PAGE 200
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Play Settings - Show Control Press SETUP and use the right/left arrows to select the Show Control Settings tab. • • Use the down arrow to select a cell. Use MODIFY or # MODIFY to change values. Show Control Settings The Show Control Settings are general for the system. UDP Strings UDP (User Datagram Protocol) is a communications protocol where messages are exchanged between computers in a network that uses the Internet Protocol (IP). See UDP data.
PAGE 201
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Function Explanation Default value Input Port The Input Port Cobalt listens to 0 Output Port The Output port Cobalt sends to 0 Output IPs The Output IP(s) Cobalt sends to, add multiple and separate with semicolon ";". 0 OSC Open Sound Control (OSC) is a content format for messaging among computers, sound synthesizers, and other multimedia devices. See OSC Functionality.
PAGE 202
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Settings The Console Settings are set from the node Console Settings in the Setup node of the Browser. (Browser >General Settings >Console Settings). You can set the values from 0-100%. They will take effect immediately and are NOT related to different play files. At Mode Sets At Mode for the console. An indicator will show that it is active, in the status bar at the bottom of all screens. At Mode point style This allows you to enter levels "5.5" for 55 and then ".
PAGE 203
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 204
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 205
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sound Settings The volume of the internal speaker is set by holding SETUP and moving the level Wheel. You will see the result in the value next to the loudspeaker symbol in the top right corner of the monitor screens. This will take effect immediately and is NOT related to different play files. You can also right-click on the speaker to open a context menu for setting sound levels.
PAGE 206
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 DMX Settings (7.1) DMX Settings for the outputs of the console. The main reason for changing output speed is that you are controlling older equipment that isn't compatible with full speed DMX.
PAGE 207
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Network Cobalt has client/server networking with multiple operators. It is possible to send and fetch a play between Server and Backup. There is backup sync for running shows.
PAGE 208
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Network - Introduction A Cobalt network consists of a Server and a Backup, and/or Clients. A Server can have up to ten Clients. NOTE Any Cobalt20, Cobalt 10 or older hardware running Cobalt, for example a Congo Jr, Congo Kid or Cobalt Light Server can be started as Server, Backup or Client. A backup can only back up within its channel and output limitations. General Facts • • • • A system can be setup to start as either Server, Backup or auto-detect.
PAGE 209
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Network - Functions These are the general network functions.
PAGE 210
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Network - Server/Backup Backup consoles/Light Servers are used when it is imperative that control of the lighting system be maintained in the event of a failure of the server. A Backup sends no data to the lighting system until it has activated and taken over by converting to a server (either manually or automatically due to loss of communication with a server). It is possible to use a crossed cable with just two consoles.
PAGE 211
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 When the contact is lost between two linked Cobalts a message is shown in the Message area (bottom of screens), and the Backup Cobalt is automatically converted to Server. ETCNet2 You can connect to ETC nodes with a Switch (avoid routers, they tend to complicate things). Cobalt consoles/Client PCs should be given IP addresses in the 10.101.201.101+ range when used with ETCNet2. Please see the ETCNet2 v4 Planning Guide for information on configuring an ETCNet2 network.
PAGE 212
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 When the Auto-transfer setting is checked in both Server and Backup, the following actions will be performed each time you make a New, Open, Save or Save As command on the Server: • • • Transfer play to the Backup. Save play on the Backup. Activate Sync mode. You can also set the system to transfer the play automatically every time you record a preset, in the Recording Setup. Hold SETUP and press RECORD.
PAGE 213
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Network - Client You can use the ETC Net3 Remote Video Interface or a personal computer as a client. You can connect a maximum of ten clients to a server. You need a dongle to run the software in a personal computer as a Client to an existing Server. See Net3 Remote Video Interface. To log in as a Client, use the CLIENT key from the Login Screen of Cobalt. Once you are logged in as Backup or Server you have to log out to log in as a Client again.
PAGE 214
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 For the following commands use the CLIENT key of the console. Action Keys Feedback Toggle Clients on/off [CLIENT] Confirmation message at bottom of screens. Set permission modes [CLIENT] (held) As long as CLIENT is held permissions can be set with the direct selects. Currently only Full Access and View Only Mode are available. NOTE Be careful when using the client since you are making changes directly in the server. Don't try to work on the patch from the client.
PAGE 215
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Network - Multiple Users In a Multi User setup there will always be a Server. You can connect up to ten clients to this Server. Each client can access and work independently with the data of the Play in the Server. Playback controls are shared (See Multiple Users - Global Functions). This is a true client/server system. This means that all light output is calculated and output from the Server at all times. To set up a Multi User system it is important to do things in a specific order.
PAGE 216
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Highlight Mode This is a global mode, both affecting and indicated on all screens on all stations. Grand Master The Grand Master is global. This means any user can control it for the whole system. Freeze The Freeze switch is global. This means any user can control it for the whole system. B.O. The Blackout switch is global. This means any user can control it for the whole system. Independents The Independents are global. This means any user can control them for the whole system.
PAGE 217
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Server Commands These are the general Server functions. This chapter contains the following sections • • • • Send Play Fetch Play Backup Sync Force To Backup Send Play Play data is not replicated automatically - for security reasons. A play can only be sent from Server to Backup. Always send or fetch the most current play before running a show. 1. Select the Browser by pressing BROWSER (if it was selected it will be closed, press again to open). 2.
PAGE 218
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 3. Select Fetch Play and press MODIFY. You will get a confirmation message in the bottom of the screens. Once the Play is transferred you have the same Play information in both consoles. The Play file name is transferred, and the playbacks in the receiving system will position to the same steps as in the main system. If you make changes in either console, you have to transfer the Play to update the other console.
PAGE 219
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Backup Sync The link between the two consoles is activated from the Network node of the Browser. This can only be done from the Server . The following things are synchronized • • • • • • • • Loading new content into a Master. Activating content from a Master with the Master key. Changing the level of a Master fader. Loading new content into the Main or Master Playback. Starting a playback with the GO, GOTO, GO BACK and PAUSE keys.
PAGE 220
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Backup Commands These are the general Backup functions. This chapter contains the following sections • • Fetch Play Convert To Server Fetch Play Play data is not replicated automatically - for security reasons. Always send or fetch the most current play before running a show. 1. Select the Browser by pressing BROWSER (if it was selected it will be closed, press again to open). 2. Use the down and right arrow keys to open the NETWORK node. 3. Select Fetch Play and press MODIFY.
PAGE 221
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Changing manually 1. Select the Browser by pressing BROWSER (if it was selected it will be closed, press again to open). 2. Use the down and right arrow keys to open the NETWORK node. 3. Select Convert To Server and press MODIFY. You will get a confirmation message in the bottom of the screens.
PAGE 222
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Network nodes This node shows all Cobalt devices on the network, including the one you are working on, which is indicated with a * before the name. You can see the role, IP address and logical network in the Info area. See System Settings.
PAGE 223
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Find/configure CEM + This opens an explorer window to discover CEM dimmers on the network. See the manual for the CEM dimmers for more information.
PAGE 224
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Net3/ACN Device List Lists all Net3 Devices in the network, and allows some editing. Cobalt servers and backups will automatically connect to discovered CEM3s as it does with CEM+s when it is configured to do so. Cobalt console will attempt re-connect CEM3s when a network disconnect occurs as it does with CEM+s. Press MODIFY to open the Net3/ACN Device List HINTS (5.1) RFR BaseStation and RFR Handheld devices are shown in the list. RFR Host is shown as active.
PAGE 225
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Screens You can store all screen settings including zoom, channel format and split tabs into 100 screen memories. They are stored in the Direct Selects, as Screens. The first six are accessible by the screen buttons between the touch screens. When you press a screen key, all screens will change to the stored layout and format. Screens are recorded in the Direct Selects.
PAGE 226
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Select the Text cell, press MODIFY and enter a text.
PAGE 227
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Load screen You can load a screen from the direct selects or from the Browser. To load from the Browser, select the screen and press MODIFY or double click. Delete Screens Open the screen list in the Browser >General Settings >Screens, to see and delete screens. Select a screen and press DELETE.
PAGE 228
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dock Areas Cobalt is designed so windows never overlap. There is a concept of tabs that are opened in the middle of each screen, and dock areas around them.
PAGE 229
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dock Areas - Introduction Hold BROWSER and press up/down/left/right arrow to select an existing dock in the selected screen. & Dock areas are fast and flexible control and viewing panels that can be set up in the top/bottom/left/right borders of each screen. The left Browser dock and the bottom Effect dock are opened by default. Once they are set up you can toggle the content by holding BROWSER and pressing FORMAT. You can also use the context menu to change content in every dock.
PAGE 230
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 1. Left Dock (Default set to Browser on screen 1) 2. Top Dock 3. Bottom Dock 4.
PAGE 231
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dock Areas - Functions The dock areas are easy to use once they are configured. Two dock areas are set up default, the left (browser) and the bottom (effects) on screen 1. You can toggle the contents of any selected dock area by holding BROWSER and pressing FORMAT. Left click/touch on the right side of the dock header and get the selection popup for dock type (See Select Content, below). Configure Dock Areas A dock area has to be configured before you can use it.
PAGE 232
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Select Content Tap or right click on the title bar of a dock to select content from the context menu. Left & Right dock Top & bottom dock NOTE You can resize any open dock area either holding FORMAT and moving the level wheel, OR just left-clicking and dragging with the mouse or trackball. Navigate Dock Areas Tap on a Dock Area title bar to open and close. Dock Areas can be also be opened with these key combinations or using a mouse. 1. Dock Area title bar Tap to open/close. 2.
PAGE 233
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 3. Content context menu Tap and hold to choose format for content. Mouse functions • • • • Right-click for context menu Right-click on header to choose format Double-click (left) on dock to open Drag on divider line to resize Key functions Function Key Feedback Open/close the Browser [BROWSER] The Browser dock in screen 1 is operated directly with the Browser key. Open/close the right dock [BROWSER] & [Right_arrow] Right area is opened.
PAGE 234
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Mimic Dock The Console Mimic dock gives you the user interface of the physical console. • • • • • • Click on a button or fader to press or move. Pressed button is indicated with a yellow background. Hold CTRL and click on a button to "hold" it so you can press another button after. Combine the Console Mimic and keyboard or console commands in any way. Press FORMAT to toggle different console mimic formats Hold FORMAT and use the Level Wheel to zoom.
PAGE 235
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Designer Summary The designer summary provides playback information at a glance that is intended to be useful for the lighting designer. There are three formats that can be toggled with the FORMAT key or context menu: • • • Main playback & selected (channels) Selected (channels) Main playback 1. Main Playback • • • • • • Palette information for A or B depending on what is selected in the Crossfade Settings, see Play Settings - Crossfade.
PAGE 236
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Selected - Live dock The selected - live dock shows all currently selected channels and effect playbacks. This is the view that will show effect playbacks and channels together.
PAGE 237
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Time Code dock The Time Code dock provides a summary of the important time code features and information. To the right, use the screen buttons to select Internal or External time code source. Enable BU (BackUp) clock will set the internal clock to take over if the external source is lost. Console Time code Settings • • LEARN activates learn mode. See MIDI - Time Code Auto Locate activates auto location.
PAGE 238
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Cobalt Device Controls Dock As soon as a device is selected, all non-intensity parameters are available in the Device Controls Dock. In the ALL tab parameter values will be fetched from the first device in the selection that has such a parameter defined. This works both for decimal channels where the parameter values of the sub channels are shown when the the whole channel is selection. It also works when selecting different types of devices at the same time.
PAGE 239
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 2. Virtual control • • Color Mixing tab Gel Picker NOTE When more than one device is selected, all parameters are displayed for all selected devices. You can use Next/Last to access individual parameters within the current selection.
PAGE 240
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 the valid color space for the fixture type. Colors outside of the black line are not achievable by the color mixing system of that device. The Hue and Saturation controls will move the dot in the color wheel either around the wheel from one color to the next (Hue) or along the radius of the wheel where the dot is currently located (Saturation). The closer the dot gets to the center of the circle, the closer to white the color system is moving – approaching a saturation of zero.
PAGE 241
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 light can create. The maximum saturation level may be different depending on the other colors in the mix. Also, it is possible that devices may be able to create colors using raw controls that the generalized HueSaturation system won’t allow. If you want to control the raw parameters of the fixtures, please use the Color tab instead. THE GEL PICKER The GelPicker tab includes buttons that correspond to the color filter manufacturers in the Cobalt library.
PAGE 242
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Cobalt Direct Select Dock The Direct Select Dock is default selected in the left screen bottom dock area. If you are opening an existing play set up this dock area as described in Configure Dock Areas. The Direct Selects dock contains sets of buttons that can be assigned provide direct access to a number of different data types: • • • • record targets, like groups and palettes parameter ranges for devices, like color wheels, gobo wheels, strobe, etc.
PAGE 243
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 9. Tap the Rows+ button to increase the number of buttons displayed up to 5 rows/50 buttons. Tap once more to return to 2 rows/20 buttons. 10. Tap the Matrix button to access the 10x10 view. Tap the Rows+ button to return to the normal view. 11. The blocks of direct select buttons may be displayed with 2, 3, 4 or 5 rows of 10 buttons each, or as a full 10x10 matrix.
PAGE 244
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 White means no channels in this group are selected. (See Groups) Auto Group Tap an Auto Group to select the channels of this group. Auto Groups are automatically created from types of templates in the Device Patch and labels in the Channel Database. (See Auto Groups) PresetSel Tap the preset number in a DS button to select the channels with intensity in that preset. This allows you to use presets as groups for channel selection.
PAGE 245
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Tap the master button and without lifting your finger, slide your finger up and down to adjust the output level of that master. Use the direct select keys like master faders, especially useful with Cobalt Nomad or when you want to adjust a master you don’t currently have assigned to a fader. (See Masters) Screen Tap so activate any recorded Screen setting. (See Screens) Client Tap to enable/disable connected clients. Displays connected clients.
PAGE 246
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Bank Sets the block of direct selects to a range of that data type, based on the current number of buttons displayed multiplied by five pages. For example, with 20 buttons displayed, a bank equals 100 possible objects. With 50 buttons displayed, a bank equals 250 objects. The bank is subdivided into pages for quick access to additional objects. Page One fifth of a bank.
PAGE 247
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 User List User logins allow you to keep personal settings for Direct Selects, Screens and Notes, within the same Play as other users. See Direct Selects, and Notes. It's also possible to connect Partitions to User Logins, which makes it possible to have a User Login with a predefined set of channels that can be accessed by that user. See Partitions. You can view, edit and create new Users in the User List (Browser >General Settings >User List).
PAGE 248
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 * Please note that the Default Partition has to be set to YES in the User Partition List as well - this is done automatically. NOTE The default Users "Default" and "View" are defined to allow access to the full system. Create a User Login User Logins are created in the User List. 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the User List (BROWSER >General Settings >User List). Press INSERT to create a new User. Select the Name cell and press MODIFY to enter a text label.
PAGE 249
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Change User User Login is activated from the command Change User in the Browser. If no User has been logged in, the Default User will be logged in when a Play is opened. 1. Select the node Change User and press MODIFY (BROWSER >General Settings >Change User). You will get a popup where you can choose from all defined Users. 2. The User is activated and indicated in the top left corner of all screens: Any Partitions associated to this User will be activated. See Partitions.
PAGE 250
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Event List An Event combines a Trigger with an Action Macro. Action Macros are a powerful way of creating commands inside Cobalt and to control external devices. Triggers can start Cobalt commands from external inputs like the COM port (unison macros for example).
PAGE 251
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Event List - Introduction An Event is a combination of a Trigger and an Action Macro. An Action Macro can be defined also directly in the step of a Sequence. Action Macro An Action Macro consists of a string of characters forming a line of commands. These commands can be used to trigger internal actions (Go, Pause etc) or external devices (DVD players, computers etc) with serial & MIDI commands Trigger A Trigger is used only to trigger an Action Macro.
PAGE 252
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Event List - Action Macros An Action is a kind of Macro that consists of a string of characters forming a line of commands. These commands can be internal (Cobalt) or external (COM port serial communication with DVD player, computers etc). Action Macros can be entered directly in the Sequence Action Macro column. Action Macros can be linked to Triggers in the Event list. In the Playback View Action Macros are shown with the"*" character or the word "Action Macro" depending on format.
PAGE 253
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Cobalt Action Macros These are the available Cobalt Action Macros. Some have changed from over the years. Please note that existing Action Macros using the changed commands will not be converted automatically. They have to be manually updated to work as expected. Remember the RULES. Function Command Information Master START START Mx Moves Master x to 'target' percent in <,target> <,time> 'time' seconds Master GO Go Mx Mx,preset,time.
PAGE 254
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Examples Go M3,100 (Master 3 GOTO Preset 100 in default time) Go PB,1 (Goto Step 1 in the sequence of the Main Playback) Relay 1 ,2 ,ON (Set relay 2 in group 1 to ON) See also OSC Functionality Serial COM data In an Action Macro, this data is started with the word COM. Two parameters are used after the COM type. • • Group number (group 0 is the local console) followed by a comma.
PAGE 255
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • • • Group number (group 0 is the local console) followed by a comma. The data bytes are separated by a space character. A hex byte is always written as two hexadecimal characters (like 7E) followed by a space. Basically any type of MIDI message can be sent from an Action Macro. Note On, Note Off, Program Change and System Exclusive (including Midi Show Control) messages are most frequently used.
PAGE 256
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 257
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Event List - Events To trigger an Action Macro from an external input an Event has to be created and a Trigger has to be defined. This is done in the Event List. For each type of trigger (input), an Event list needs to be created. This is to allow for future expansion of both internal ports and network ports. 1. Open the Event List Insert an item (INSERT) and define a Trigger (you can add a description). 2. Open the editor by pressing MODIFY in the first column.
PAGE 258
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Use INSERT to insert a new line. Define the Trigger and Action string using the formats described in Actions & Events - Actions. You can add a description as well (recommended) Triggers for Events An Event is a way to link a Trigger to an Action Macro. A Trigger can be serial communication received on a COM or MIDI port of the console. Note that COM x,' and 'MIDI x,' are not required in Triggers.
PAGE 259
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Macro List A Macro is basically a series of key presses and actions that are stored under a number for random playback. • • • • • Macros can be recorded and played back in real time or fast. Macros can be linked to a sequence or chase step. Each Macro can have a text label. Macros can not be edited. There is an indication in the top right corner when a Macro is being played back. The Macro List is opened by holding MODIFY and pressing MACRO.
PAGE 260
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Macros - Record & Playback Macros are recorded with the LEARN MACRO soft key of the Misc Soft key page in the consoles. Record a Macro 1. Select the Misc Soft Key page. 2. Enter a number and press LEARN MACRO. As long as recording is going on the text "Recording macro" is displayed in the top right corner of the screens. 3. Click on Recording Macro in the top right corner of the screens to end recording.
PAGE 261
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Playback a Macro Enter the number and press MACRO. As long as the Macro is being played back the text "Playing macro" is displayed in the top right corner of the screens.
PAGE 262
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Patching Before you can control a channel or moving device, it needs to be patched.
PAGE 263
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Patch - Introduction Patch is where outputs are assigned to channels, either directly in the case of dimmers or using a Template in the case of devices. All settings pertaining to outputs, channels and devices are also adjusted within the patch. Before you can control a dimmer or device it has to be patched to a channel. When opening a new play you can choose to set the Patch 1:1 or cleared. There are many ways to patch. These are the available options.
PAGE 264
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Patch by Channel/Dimmer Press OUTPUT in the programming section to open the Output Editor. (BROWSER >Patching >Patch by Channel/Dimmer) From here you can patch by channel or by dimmer. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select by Output or by Channel.
PAGE 265
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Levels are shown in 8 bits (0-255). Changing Levels are shown with a blue background for going up. Levels are shown with a green background going down Number of the channel this output is patched to Unpatched outputs A device is held together with a color, and all parameter names are shown for each output.
PAGE 266
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Output Editor - Formats The currently selected format is indicated in the top right corner. You can toggle between these formats by pressing FORMAT, or from the context menu (touch or click on the current format title). • • • • All outputs Patched Un-patched Selected Level of detail Compact level of detail (Hold FORMAT and press down/up arrow).
PAGE 267
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 268
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Zoom Out Hold FORMAT and move the level Wheel to zoom out/in. When you zoom out you will see all available universes.
PAGE 269
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Output Editor - Patch By Channel As soon as a channel is selected, the Output Editor is automatically in channel mode. Select a single channel or a range of channels to patch to Outputs. Use 0 MODIFY to unpatch. Patch a single channel Action Key Feedback 1. Select channel [#] [CHANNEL] Channel is selected. 2. Patch to output [#] [MODIFY] A popup will ask if you want to replace existing output(s)* 3. Confirm [MODIFY] Patch is complete. Action Key Feedback 1.
PAGE 270
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Patch a single output Action Key Feedback 1. Select output [#] [OUTPUT] Output is selected. You can use the format output.universe. 2. Patch to channel [#] [MODIFY] A popup will ask if you want to replace existing channel* 3. Confirm [MODIFY] Patch is complete. Action Key Feedback 1. Select output range Output functions Outputs are selected 2. Patch to channel(s) [#] [MODIFY] A popup will ask if you want to patch all to one channel or as a range*.
PAGE 271
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 * Output Editor - Dimmer Check Mode Dimmer Check mode is a fast way to check the outputs consecutively. 1. Select first output with # OUTPUT 2. Set a level for checking with # @ LEVEL (a level is given between 0-255. 128 = 50%) 3. Press + or - to use this level and step to the next/previous Output. Levels that are higher than zero are restored automatically as they are passed by. 4. Deselect the last output to leave channel check mode (0 OUTPUT).
PAGE 272
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Import Template Wizard (7.1) Before you can patch a moving device you need to import or create the corresponding template. • • • • To import from the libraries, use the Import Template Wizard in the Browser (Browser >Patching > Import Template Wizard). User templates from other Plays are imported with the Import Wizard. See Import Wizard. Custom templates can be created from scratch with the Templates Editor. You can save and import user templates to the User Library. 1.
PAGE 273
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Devices with calibrated color data are indicated - this means they will be possible to use with the Gel Picker and calibrated Color Picker even if they have more than three color emitters.It is possible to select the tree view when focused by pressing MODIFY (similar to how we enter a text field). You can then navigate inside the tree view with the arrow keys. Leave the tree view by pressing MODIFY again.
PAGE 274
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Patch Wizard The Patch Wizard is opened from the Browser (Browser >Patching >Patch Wizard). See Navigating Browser. There are three sections • • • Patch Dimmer - patch one, or a range of dimmers Patch Device - patch one, or a range of devices Set/Clear - clear or reset a range/all outputs, devices or renaming.
PAGE 275
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Patch Dimmer(s) Enter the number of dimmers, the desk channel, DMX address and universe. If you check Replace existing dimmers, these will be unpatched automatically. Patch Device(s) Select a template from the list, or open the Import Template Wizard. See Import Template Wizard. Importing a template will add it to the list in this dropdown. Enter the number of devices, desk channel, DMX address and universe.
PAGE 276
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE Patched devices are automatically set to default values. See Home Positioning. NOTE As soon as a moving device is patched, the channel symbol in the channel views will get an extra field for moving device information. Set/Clear patch or rename You can reset (1:1) or clear the dimmer patch, the moving device patch, or the renaming system for any channel range from # to #. If you check "Apply To All" you don't need to specify a range.
PAGE 277
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 These are the options in the Clear wizard tab See Renaming Channels NOTE Checking Apply To All clears everything up to the total system limits regardless of any prior downgrade of channels/outputs.
PAGE 278
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device List Hold MODIFY and press DEVICE to open the Device List where you can view and edit moving device settings. (BROWSER >Patching >Device List). & See Introduction To Patching Remaining outputs are indicated in the hint text line¨at the bottom. Device Settings - Columns & Functions Column Input Function Item No input The number of this item - cannot be edited here. Channel 0-3072 The number of the desk channel this device is assigned to.
PAGE 279
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 address.universe. You can change universe by ".universe" Inv. Pan Off/On You can invert pan for this device on the input (manual control) or output (stored data) Inv. Tilt Off/On You can invert tilt for this device on the input (manual control) or output (stored data) Swap Pan/Tilt Off/On Swap pan/tilt for this device. Scroller Roll Dropdown menu Shows the assigned scroller roll - dropdown to change. See Scroller Rolls.
PAGE 280
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE When you patch a template with multiple parts, separate devices will be created for the various parts and decimal channel numbers will be assigned. Changing the start address of the base channel will update the sub devices accordingly. Edit/Change a Device You can exchange one moving device with another in the Device List. All parameters that are similar will continue functioning.
PAGE 281
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 >Settings and Tools - Patching These are the settings and tools for Patching.
PAGE 282
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel List Hold MODIFY and press CHANNEL to open the Channel List. You can view and edit dimmer outputs, scaling and constant ch level in the Channel List (BROWSER >Patching >Settings & Tools >Channel List). & See Patch - Introduction for more information.
PAGE 283
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel List - Columns & Functions Column Input Function Channel No input The number of this Channel - cannot be edited here (see Output List). Dimmer Address #.# Enter the address, followed by decimal point and then DMX universe. You can change the universe by entering ".#" Dimmer Address [MODIFY] Opens an Output Editor for adding multiple outputs or editing. Device No input Shows the device template - cannot be edited here (see Device Settings). Device Address #.
PAGE 284
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel List - Select & Patch Channels It is possible to select and patch channels to outputs directly with a Command Syntax in this list (this does not work in At Mode). Function Key Feedback Select a channel [#] [CHANNEL] The channel is selected in the list and in the Live tab. Add a channel to this selection [#] [+] The channel is added to the current selection. Add a range of channels to this selection [#] [THRU] The channel range is added to the current selection.
PAGE 285
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Patch - Rename Channels Hold MODIFY and press CHANNEL to open the Channel List. & You can change the number used to access your instruments, without altering your Patch. This is useful when you want to keep your addresses and dimmer assignments as they are, but you want to change the numbering to fit the numbering of a Plot.
PAGE 286
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Change a channel name Function Key Feedback Change name [#] [MODIFY] Enter a new name and press MODIFY. If the name exists you will get a warning message about this. Change names [#] [MODIFY] Select several cells, enter a start name and press MODIFY. Remove selected channel(s) [0] [MODIFY] from all channel views If a Name is set to zero, the channel will disappear from all channel views and cannot be accessed until given a name.
PAGE 287
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Output List Hold MODIFY and press OUTPUT to open the Output List. This is an extremely useful tab for troubleshooting and patching dimmers. & You can view and edit desk channel, scaling and curve for outputs in the Output List (BROWSER >Patching >Output List >Universe #).
PAGE 288
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE The Output List is divided into DMX universes. Open each from the Browser >Patching >Output List >Universe # Output List - Columns & Functions Column Input Function Output (EDMX)* No input The number of this Output (and EDMX) cannot be edited here. Channel 0-3072 Enter the number, followed by MODIFY. Proportion 0-100% Sets a proportional scaling factor for the intensity of this output (channels can be scaled in the Channel List).
PAGE 289
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Output List - Select & Patch Outputs It is possible to select outputs directly with a Command Syntax in this list (only in RPN mode). Function Key Feedback Select output [#] [OUTPUT] The output is selected in the list and in the Live tab. Add output [#] [+] The output is added to the current selection. Add a range [#] [THRU] The output range is added to the current selection. Patch to channel [#] [MODIFY] The output selection is patched to channel #.
PAGE 290
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Parked Hold PARK and press a channel, parameter group (FOCUS, COLOR, BEAM) or parameter key to park at a fixed value. & Hold UNPARK and press a channel, parameter group (FOCUS, COLOR, BEAM) or parameter key to unpark.
PAGE 291
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Parking an output or attribute means it will remain fixed at the parked value regardless of all other functionality. 1. 2. 3. When an intensity or parameter is parked there is a PARK indication at the top of every screen. Channels that have parked parameters are dimmed. Parameter cells that are parked are dimmed.
PAGE 292
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Park - Parked Items List The Parked Items list shows all parked channels, intensities and attributes. Individual items can be unparked by selecting the appropriate row and pressing [DELETE]. See Parked.
PAGE 293
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Templates A Template maps the functions of a Device to the Device controls of Cobalt. This chapter is about creating and editing Templates.
PAGE 294
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Templates - Introduction A template maps the attributes of a moving Device to the controls and functions of Cobalt. Most common devices and scrollers already have templates in the library, ready to use. General Facts • • • • • • • • Templates can be edited or created at any time. Templates are stored to and imported from Plays. Change a Template during a show and all similar parameters will continue functioning. Table ranges can be set to control modes in devices such as the x.
PAGE 295
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Templates - List The Template List is opened from the BROWSER (Browser >Patching >Settings and Tools >Templates). Template List - Columns & Functions Function Key Feedback Template [MODIFY] The ID of each Template. Press MODIFY to open the Editor Manufacturer [MODIFY] Manufacturer name. Press MODIFY to activate and end text input. Name [MODIFY] Template name. Press MODIFY to activate and end text input. Parameters [MODIFY] The number of DMX channels it uses.
PAGE 296
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Templates - Editor The Template Editor is opened from the Item or Parameter cell in the Template List (Browser >Patching >Templates). Open an existing one directly in this node as well (Browser >Patching >Templates >xxxx).
PAGE 297
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 298
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Template Editor - Columns & Functions Press INSERT to insert a new Parameter. These are the functions in the columns. Function Key Feedback Parameter [MODIFY] Opens a dropdown. Select parameter. DMX [#] [MODIFY] Set DMX offset (1-256). Type [MODIFY] Set HTP (intensity) or LTP 8/16bits. Default [MODIFY] The default value that is used when patched, and by HOME ATTRIB. Highlight [MODIFY] The value used in Highlight mode. Snap [MODIFY] Set Snap or Fade.
PAGE 299
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Templates - Create 1. Open the Template List from the Browser (Browser >Patching >Templates) 2. Go to the end of the list and press INSERT to select a new Template. 3. Enter a name in the text column (press MODIFY to activate and MODIFY to store). 4. Press MODIFY in the first column.
PAGE 300
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 This will open the Template Editor, which will be empty. 5. Use INSERT to create as many steps as the Moving Device has control channels.
PAGE 301
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 6. Edit the columns for each step to fit the specification of the Moving Device. Start with Parameter. 7. Continue with DMX channel within the device. These two are the most important. See the rest of this chapter and the manual of the device to specify the rest.
PAGE 302
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Templates - Type LTP or HTP Each parameter in a Template can be set to LTP (Latest Takes Precedence) or HTP (Highest Takes Precedence). • • • HTP8 is used for intensity parameters LTP8 is used for 8 bit parameters LTP16 is used for 16 bit parameters* This is set in the Template Editor. See Device Templates - Editor. *Observe that the DMX offset of a parameter has to be incremented by 2, if the previous parameter is set to 16-bit resolution.
PAGE 303
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Templates - Type 8/16 bit control Some Devices have parameters that require 16 bit control. Usually this is Pan or Tilt. This is set in Type cell of the Template Editor.
PAGE 304
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 16 Bit Control And Wheel Behaviour The functionality of "Coarse/Fine 16 bit control" is set in the Attribute Setup. Hold SETUP and press ATTRIB. • • On = The wheel controls the Coarse part of the16- bit value. Hold the wheel key down and move the wheel to control the Fine part of the 16-bit value. Off (default) = The wheel will control Coarse when moved fast, and Fine when moved slowly.
PAGE 305
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 16 Bit Control - Fine Step Devices with 16 bit control rarely use all 16 bits. Therefore it is possible to fine tune the resolution of this parameter in the cell Fine Step in the Template Editor. Full 16 bit control, which few Devices use (generally Media Servers, for example Catalyst) require this value to be set to 1 (default = 4).
PAGE 306
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Templates - Snap or Fade Snap or Fade is defined in the Template Editor. When set to Snap (checked) it will not be affected by times. It will move at the beginning of each repositioning. When Snap is Off (unchecked) - the parameter will fade on times. See Devices - Times. Press modify in the Parameter cell to toggle On/Off.
PAGE 307
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Templates - Ranges The Template Range Editor makes it possible to define (and edit) ranges, subranges and positions (for colors, gobos etc) in Templates. This editor is opened by pressing MODIFY in the Range column of the Template Editor. This is the range editor for the Strobe parameter in a Mac 300™ There is a Range Wizard to create ranges. See Template Range Wizard.
PAGE 308
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Template Range Editor - Columns Function Value Feedback Min 0-255 This is the start value for a sub range*. The same value for Min and Max will be treated like a position (for a color or gobo for example). The Min value can be entered in the Min% column as well. Max 0-255 This is the end value for a sub range*. The Max value can be entered in the Max% column as well. Min% 0-100 The Min value can be entered as % here instead of bits (0-255) in Min.
PAGE 309
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 3. Enter the number of ranges you wish to create and press MODIFY. 4. Step to Centered and Snap Positions with arrow keys. Use MODIFY to toggle. • • Centered = The middle value of a range is always output when selected Snap Positions = Fixed positions (Start = Stop) 5. Select EXECUTE and press MODIFY (previously existing ranges will be overwritten).
PAGE 310
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Templates - Mode Tables ModeTables make it possible to control multiple mode devices such as, for example, the High End x.Spot™. • • A set of ranges are defined for a parameter. The Table defines which range is used for one parameter based upon the Range setting of another parameter. In the High End x.Spot™ there are Mode parameters (color mode) that affect the function of another parameter (color wheel).
PAGE 311
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 3. Use INSERT* to create a Range Tables. These are the options. Function Key Feedback Parameter [MODIFY] Opens a dropdown. Select the mode parameter that activates this Range Table. Range [MODIFY] Opens a dropdown. Select the range position in the mode parameter that activates this Range Table. Ranges [MODIFY] Opens the Range Editor for defining these ranges. *When you make INSERT for additional Range Tables, the parameter will be copied from the first defined Range Table.
PAGE 312
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Templates - Fade With Intensity Fade with Intensity can be set in the Template Editor. This is useful for controlling a softlight or LED fixture with color mix coming from colored fluorescents, that also are light sources. It makes it possible to mix a color and fade the intensity of the result without changing the Hue (color mix result). This example is from a Color Kinetics™ LED ColorBlast. When On, the parameter will be scaled through the intensity channel of the device.
PAGE 313
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 User Templates All user templates, new or modified, that are in the User Library are displayed in the User Templates node (Browser >Patching >Settings & Tools >User Templates). This is where you can add templates from your current show file to the User Library, and/or delete user templates from the User Library. See User Library. • • Use INSERT to select a template from the show file to store into the User library. Use DELETE to delete a template from the library.
PAGE 314
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Parameter Definitions Parameter types are defined in the first cell or the Template Editor. Each parameter is used differently. For example, Pan and Tilt automatically belong to Focus Palettes, and are mapped to the trackball in Parameter mode. Press MODIFY in the Parameter cell to open the dropdown. Select with arrow keys (or use the first letter from the keyboard) and press MODIFY to confirm. The Parameters are picked from the Parameter Definition Editor.
PAGE 315
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Function Description Parameter Parameter ID - cannot be changed. Name The name is used for controlling the parameter.
PAGE 316
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Group Description INT All intensities belong to INT.
PAGE 317
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dimmer Curve List The Dimmer Curve List contains set of default Curves can be assigned to dimmers in the Output Setup. It is also possible to create user specific dimmer curves. (Browser >Patching >Settings & Tools >Dimmer Curve List) When you open a new show some default curves are loaded (contained in the file CURVES.DEF).
PAGE 318
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Patch - Dimmer Curve Editor It is possible to create any kind of curve in the Dimmer Curve Editor. Action Key Feedback 1. Open the Dimmer Curve Browser >Patching List >Dimmer Curve List The Dimmer Curve List is opened. 2. Insert a New Curve [INSERT] A new curve is inserted. You can name it in the Text cell. 3. Open the Dimmer Curve [MODIFY] Editor Press MODIFY in the Dimmer Curve cell to open the editor. Dimmer Curve Editor (example: On/Off Curve) Action Key Feedback 4.
PAGE 319
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Main Show Data The main show data is what you generate when you start recording. All data are under this node of the Browser, except effects, which have a node of their own.
PAGE 320
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Organizer (1 tab) The ORGANIZER key opens the Organizer tab where you can view, edit and restructure all data in your show, The Organizer can be opened with focus on a specific type of data or with all show data visible at once.
PAGE 321
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Most things in the Organizer can be edited. There are two main working methods in the Organizer • • Drag and drop with mouse Context Menus (SELECT SELECT) You can press TRACK for items like presets, groups, palettes to track use in the current Play. Opening Focused Organizer Tabs You can open an organizer tab with only one type of object focused by holding LOAD and pressing one of the following keys.
PAGE 322
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 323
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Execute from the Organizer In the Organizer there is a function that allows you to execute (play back) Sequence Steps, Groups and Presets in the Live field directly. Right-click on the appropriate object to open the context menu and select Execute. Drag and Drop in the Organizer You can click, hold and drag items in the Organizer from one place to another. See Sequence - Drag and Drop .
PAGE 324
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 325
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 If you drag and drop an item on top of a similar item, for example a Sequence Step, you get the option of creating a copy of this item or moving it.
PAGE 326
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 There is also an advanced tab where you can choose if you want to create an extra step, an extra preset, before or after or replacing the step you dropped it on.
PAGE 327
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Organizer (2 tabs) This is the same organizer as the 1 tab organizer, with the option of being able to move items between two windows, to make work simpler. (Browser >Main Show Data >Organizer (2 tabs).
PAGE 328
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Functionality, see Organizer (1 tab).
PAGE 329
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Groups Groups are a way of recalling a channel selection with a single number. They are often used to speed up programming.
PAGE 330
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Groups - Introduction The GROUP key is used to record and recall Groups. Groups are used mainly for selecting lights, but may also be assigned to masters where they function like traditional intensity submasters. You can store channel combinations into groups. The difference between a group and a Preset is that a group does not necessarily need levels for the channels involved, only the channels selected are stored regardless of how many other channels are active.
PAGE 331
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 For editing groups see Group List Functions. Groups are accessible from the remotes. See Remote Control. Group functionality • • • • • • Only selected channels are stored in a group. Each group will "remember" the order in which channels were selected to create the group. Groups are not automatically inserted into the Sequence in the Main Playback. Each group can have a text label.
PAGE 332
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 2. Enter the number of the group you just recorded and press GROUP - these channels should now be selected NOTE: If you are operating in the At Mode syntax you select a group by pressing GROUP followed by the group number. Assign this Group to a master: 1. 2. Enter the number of the Group Hold GROUP and press a master key. This group is now assigned to this master. If the group has intensities stored they will apply when the master is raised.
PAGE 333
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Groups - Record There are three ways to record a new group. Only selected channels are recorded. The selected channels can have a level, but it is not necessary. Function Key Feedback Record [RECORD] & [GROUP] You will get a popup where you confirm recording this group, and can write a text label. Record as... [#] [RECORD] & [GROUP] You will get a popup where you confirm recording this group, and can write a text label.
PAGE 334
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Groups - Select Channels You can add and subtract channels that are stored in Groups to/from the current channel selection. Function Key Feedback Select [#] [GROUP] All channels in the specified Group are selected and can be controlled by wheel or with level functions. Add [#] [GROUP] & [+] All channels in the specified Group are added to the current channel selection.
PAGE 335
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Groups - Select Channels Context Menu You can select the channels of a Group in the Browser by opening the context menu and choosing SELECT CHANNEL(S).
PAGE 336
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Groups - Fetch Intensities Fetch intensities for all or specific channels from any Group. Function Key Feedback Copy level [#] [FETCH/ON] & [GROUP] All selected channels are set to the levels stored in Group #. Copy levels and channels [#] [GROUP] & [@LEVEL] All channels in the specified Group are selected and set to the levels in Group #.
PAGE 337
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Groups - List Press GROUP to open the Groups List. You can view, edit and create new Groups directly in the Group List (GROUP or BROWSER >Main Show Data>Group). If the content of a group is changed, the top header will be purple to indicate this. The channel order of the group is indicated in the far right column.
PAGE 338
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Group List - Columns & Functions These are the functions in the Group list. Function Key Feedback Open list [GROUP] The Group List is opened. Open list at... [#] [MODIFY] & [GROUP] The Group list is opened and focused at the specified group. Update changes [UPDATE] [UPDATE] Updates all changes in the current group. There is a popup or [RECORD] [RECORD] after the first key. Insert [INSERT] Inserts a new group with the next free number, with the channels that are selected.
PAGE 339
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Groups - Display List This is a list that shows all Groups in the ML display of the Console mimic dock. For more information see Display Lists. Function Console Action Open Group list [DISPLAY_LIST] & [GROUP] Opens the Group List. Use the trackball in Display List mode to scroll. Select group Screen or mouse Select with the trackball and right- or left click. Add group Screen or mouse Hold right- or left click and press +.
PAGE 340
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Groups - Load To Playbacks You can load Groups directly to any Playback.
PAGE 341
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets A Preset is used to store intensities, attributes or attribute times for playback in a Sequence, Main- or Master Playback.
PAGE 342
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Introduction The basic building block in Cobalt is called a Preset. A preset can be played back on a master or as a step in a Sequence. General Facts • • • • • • • • • Channels, levels, attributes and Dynamic Effects are stored into Presets. Presets can be played back from the Master Playbacks, and the Main Playback one by one, or as part of a Sequence or Chase. You can store Presets with up to three decimals using Preset numbers 0.001-9999.999.
PAGE 343
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record a Preset Live Record a preset in the A field (live): 1. 2. 3. 4. Enter a number Use the level wheel to set an intensity level Press RECORD - you will get a popup suggesting the next free preset number Press RECORD again - you have now recorded a preset Try out this preset in the Main Playback (live): 1. 2.
PAGE 344
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Record The RECORD key in the programming section allows you to record the output on stage, or part of it, to a Preset. What you see in the active Channel View is what is recorded. Normally only changed moving device parameters are recorded. Function Key Feedback Record new [RECORD] Record the content of the selected Channel View to a new Preset with the next free number. You will get a popup. See The Recording Popup Record new # [#] [RECORD] Records preset #.
PAGE 345
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 The Recording Popup The recording popup has Basic, Advanced, and Times tabs. The last used tab is saved as the default choice for the next record action. The Times tab will default back to the Advanced tab for the next record action. In the Basic tab you can confirm recording a Preset (RECORD or MODIFY). You can also add a Preset or Sequence text and define the fade type.
PAGE 346
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 In the Advanced tab, in addition to the options of the basic tab, you can set a Block flag for intensities, attributes, and keep Running Dynamics. It is also possible to toggle the GoOnGo flag and toggle Section Markers.
PAGE 347
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 In the Times tab you can set fade and moving device times.
PAGE 348
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record Presets - Live Tab When the channel control is set to the Live Tab, you will record the complete stage output. The Preset is automatically added to the sequence in the Main Playback. Action Key Feedback 1. Activate the Live tab [LIVE] The Channel Controls are mapped to the A field. 1a. Record the complete stage output to a new Preset with the next free number [RECORD] You will get a popup with the next free preset suggested. You can write a text label.
PAGE 349
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record All Attributes for selected channels Depending on how attribute recording is set up only changed moving device parameters are recorded. You can record all parameters of the selected channels at any time with a shortcut (similar to a block cue). See Device Recording - Introduction. Setting Key Feedback Record selected [RECORD] & [ATTRIBUTES] Record all attributes for the selected channels to the currently loaded Preset in the A field. You will get a popup, see below.
PAGE 350
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record Directly To A Master You can record the selected channels, or all channels with an intensity on stage directly to a Master. A preset will be created automatically if none is specified. If Attribute recording is set to Automatic, attributes will also be recorded. The time is default set to 100%. See Presets - Times. Action Key Feedback Record selected [RECORD] & Master Key You will get a popup with the next free preset suggested**. Record selected as...
PAGE 351
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Update The UPDATE key in the programming section updates the preset in the playback connected to the channel control. This can be Live, Blind, any Master Playback or a step in the Preset List. Action Key Feedback Update [UPDATE] Updates changed levels and attributes to the currently loaded Preset. You will get a simpler version of the Recording popup.
PAGE 352
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - List Press PRESET to open the Preset list, which is a spreadsheet view of all presets in your play. You can view, edit and create new Presets (blind) in the Preset List. (Browser >Main Show Data >Presets). See Presets - Introduction. See also Preset List - Functions.
PAGE 353
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 1. 2. 3. 4. Current Channel View format Settings Channel view Spreadsheet view Preset List Channel View The top part of the Preset list is a channel view where you can edit all the channel and attribute values directly. Press ATTRIB to toggle to the attribute view between channels and attributes. In the attribute view you can use all the moving device controls to edit parameters.
PAGE 354
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 See Navigating - Channel Views. NOTE You can only edit attributes with console functions (wheels and keys). If you want to edit attributes on the screen, move to the Attributes cell and press MODIFY to open the Preset Attribute Editor. Preset List - Columns Column Input Function Preset No input The number of this Preset - cannot be edited. Text ABCDE... Press MODIFY to activate and end text input. This text is shown also in the Playback views.
PAGE 355
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Preset List - Functions These are the functions in the Preset list. See also Copy, Cut & Paste. Setting Key Feedback Open [PRESET] The Preset List is opened. Open [MODIFY] & [PRESET] The Preset List is opened. Open at Preset # [#] [MODIFY] & [PRESET] The Preset list is opened and focused at the specified Preset. Update focused Preset [UPDATE] Updates all changes in the current Preset. Copy Preset [#] [RECORD] Records a copy of the current Preset with this number.
PAGE 356
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Load To Playbacks You can load Presets directly to any Playback. Action Key(s) Feedback Load to A [#] [PRESET] & [A] The Preset is loaded to the A field, replacing the content of that field. Load to B [#] [PRESET] & [B] The Preset is loaded to the B field, replacing the content of that field.
PAGE 357
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Copy Copy a Preset by recording it with a different Preset number. This can be done in any Playback, or directly in the Preset List. In the Preset List it can be done with the COPY function as well. See Preset List and Copy, Cut & Paste. Action Key Feedback Copy preset [#] [RECORD] Copies the preset in the channel view connected to the channel controls to a new number. You will get a popup.
PAGE 358
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Select Channels You can add and subtract channels that are stored in Presets to/from the current channel selection. Function Key Feedback Select all [#] [PRESET] All channels with a level in the specified Preset are selected. Add to current [#] [PRESET] & [+] All channels with a level in the specified Preset are added to the current channel selection.
PAGE 359
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Fetch Intensities Press ON/FETCH to set all selected channels to their last stored levels. You can fetch intensities for all or specific channels and/or parameters from any Preset. Function Key Feedback Set last stored level [ON/FETCH] All selected channels are set to their last stored levels. Copy level [#] [ON/FETCH] All selected channels are set to the levels stored in Preset #.
PAGE 360
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Display List This is a list that shows all Presets in the ML display of the Console mimic dock. For more information see Display Lists. Function Console Action Preset Display list [DISPLAY_LIST] & [PRESET] Opens a list of all Presets. Use the trackball in Display List mode to scroll. Display Lists There are a number of Display lists that you can access in the ML Display of the Console mimic.
PAGE 361
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 These are the lists. Select an item with the trackball and right- or left click to activate it. List Shortcut Description Preset List [DISPLAY_LIST] & [PRESET] All presets. Group List [DISPLAY_LIST] & [GROUP] All groups. Click to select. Channel List [DISPLAY_LIST] & [CHANNEL] All selected channels and names. Auto Group List [DISPLAY_LIST] & [CHANNEL] [CHANNEL] All auto groups from the channel database. Click to select.
PAGE 362
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Channel Editor Wizard The Channel Editor Wizard allows you to track intensity changes in all Presets with powerful arguments. Press WIZARD in any channel view to open the Channel Wizard.
PAGE 363
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE You cannot reverse or undo changes made with this Wizard. We therefore recommend you strongly to save your play before using this function. Channel Editor Wizard - Type Of Change 6.1 You can perform the following actions through any range of Presets. The parameter "Include All Channels" will affect channels with no level (0%) as well, and is necessary in some cases.
PAGE 364
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Function Explanation Set Level Set level # Add Absolute Adds # points to the current channel(s) intensity level - adding with a value of 5, 50% becomes 55%, 80% becomes 85%. Subtract Absolute Subtract # points from the current channel(s) intensity level. Add percent Adds a % of the current channel(s) intensity level adding with a value of 10, 50% becomes 55%, 80% becomes 88%. Subtract percent Subtracts a % from the current channel(s) intensity level.
PAGE 365
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Auto-Save Each time you record a preset or a group all changes to the play since the last RECORD or Save are stored in a play called AUTOSAVE.ASC. This play is stored in the Play Archive (Browser >File >Open >Play Archive) and can be opened like any play. Function Console Feedback Open Auto Save setting [SETUP] & [RECORD] Opens a popup where you can set Auto-Save to ON. NOTE This is a feature that we recommend you to use with caution.
PAGE 366
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Times The timing information stored in a Preset, is the FCB times for device parameters. Other timing when used in a Sequence, such as channel times, in/delay/out times are stored in the Sequence Step. (See Device Times - Individual or FCB) • • The default setting for FCB times is 100% of the main In time The default setting for FCB delay times is 0 seconds. If you set FCB delay times in %, then that setting refers to main In time.
PAGE 367
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 368
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Compare Mode The COMPARE soft key allows you to temporarily toggle the current light in the active field with the recorded version of a preset in the active field. When Compare mode is active it is indicated in the top of all screens.
PAGE 369
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Action Key Feedback Compare to stored [COMPARE] The last stored version will be loaded. Press COMPARE to exit Compare mode. Compare to preset [#] [COMPARE] The selected preset will be loaded. Press COMPARE to exit Compare mode.
PAGE 370
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Delete Presets are deleted from the Preset List (Browser >Main Show Data >Presets). Action Key Feedback Delete selected Preset. [DELETE] You will get a popup where you can choose to delete the corresponding Sequence Steps this Preset is used in as well.
PAGE 371
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Renumber You can renumber presets in the organizer from the context menu in the Preset nodes. 1. Press SELECT SELECT or right click to open the context menu, then click Renumber.
PAGE 372
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 2. Press MODIFY and click to open the Change Number dialog. 3. Enter a new preset number and press MODIFY to confirm. NOTE Changing the number of a Preset will not change any of the references, such as Master Links, Masters, Sequence Steps, Content Effects, that pointed to the previous number.
PAGE 373
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Import & Undo If you need to import a preset from a previously saved version of your play, because you want to undo the current changes - it is done in the organizer. 1. Open the Import Organizer for the last saved version (name.001) in the Browser (Browser >Files >Import From >Play Archive) 2.
PAGE 374
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 3.
PAGE 375
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Presets - Multiple Import & Undo You can import a range of presets from a previously saved version of your play. 1. Open the Import Organizer for the last saved version in the Browser (Browser >Files >Import From >Play Archive) 2. Use SELECT or SHIFT & arrow/mouse to select a range of presets in the previously saved play. 3. Drag and drop on preset node in the current play 4.
PAGE 376
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Keep original spacing and gaps will keep preset numbering as it was in the old play, using the start at value to create an offset. For example, if you drag in presets numbered 1, 1.5 and 3 into the current play with a start at value of 5, the new presets will be numbered 5, 5,5 and 8. Convert to Consecutive Numbers will clean up decimals and gaps in the preset list - so dragging in the same three presets 1, 1.
PAGE 377
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences A sequence is a list of presets that can be played back manually, with fade times, and as a chase.
PAGE 378
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Introduction Press PLAYBACK in the Main Playback section to open the Playback tab. Theatrical style playback of a number of pre-recorded looks and times is called a "sequence" in Cobalt. (See Playback View) A sequence is a list of sequence steps. Each step always contains a preset. Each time a Preset is recorded in the Live tab a new Sequence step is created with that Preset. Basically everything in Cobalt can be triggered from a sequence.
PAGE 379
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 A Sequence Step consists of two main components Item Contains Read More Sequence Step Data Fade Times, Auto Times, Text, See Sequences Master Link, Master Page Link, Sequence List Macro Link, Automark flag for Attributes. Preset Intensities, Dynamics, See Preset List Attributes and Attribute Times. General Facts • • • • • • • • • You can rearrange the order in a Sequence at anytime. The same Preset can exist in several sequence steps, and sequences.
PAGE 380
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - In The Main Playback When you open a new play there is a default sequence (1) in the Main Playback. When you record a Preset in the Live field it will be added to the sequence in the Main playback.
PAGE 381
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - List Press SEQ in the programming section to open the Sequences List. You can insert and delete sequences, and change playback modes (normal/chase). (BROWSER >Main Show Data >Sequences...). Sequences List - Insert/Delete/Load Function Key Feedback Insert [#] [INSERT] Sequence # is inserted into the list Delete [DELETE] The selected sequence is deleted* Load [Master_Key] The selected sequence is loaded to this Master Playback.
PAGE 382
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences List - Columns Column Input Function Sequence [MODIFY] The number of this Step- cannot be edited. Press MODIFY to open the Sequence List. Text [MODIFY] Press MODIFY to activate and end text input. This text is shown in the top of the Playback views. Mode [MODIFY] Toggles between Normal and Chase mode. Rate [#] [MODIFY] Speeds up the playback by #% (Chase mode). Bounce [MODIFY] Sets playback to alternate continuously between forward and reverse (Chase mode).
PAGE 383
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Sequence List Press # SEQ to open a Sequence List for any sequence. You can view, edit and delete sequence steps in a Sequence list (BROWSER >Sequence >#). The currently active sequence step in the main playback is indicated with a brown background. NOTE You can open the Sequence List for the Main Playback by holding MODIFY and pressing PLAYBACK. This is not possible, however, in Tabs that use MODIFY for other functions.
PAGE 384
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequence List Channel View The top half of the Sequence List is a channel view. Press ATTRIB to toggle to the attribute view between channels and attributes. In the attribute view you can use all the moving device controls to edit parameters. NOTE You can only edit attributes with console functions (wheels and keys). If you want to edit attributes on the screen, move to the Preset cell and press MODIFY twice to open the Preset Attribute Editor.
PAGE 385
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequence List Functions Function Key Feedback Open List [#] [SEQ] The Sequence List is opened for seq #. Open List [#] [MODIFY] [SEQ] The Sequence List is opened for seq #. Go to Step [GOTO] Fades in the Main Playback to the selected step. Update Step [UPDATE] Updates level changes in the current step. Insert a new Step [#] [INSERT] Inserts a new step, with Preset #. Edit Text [MODIFY] Opens the text cell for editing.
PAGE 386
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequence List - Columns Part 1 Column Input Function Step No input The number of this Step. Cannot be edited. Preset [#] [MODIFY] This is the number of the Preset in this step. It can be edited with the Preset Change Wizard. DelayOut [#] [MODIFY] Edit the delay out time. Out [#] [MODIFY] Edit the Out time. DelayIn [#] [MODIFY] Edit the Delay In time. In [MODIFY] Edit the In time. WFA * [MODIFY] Toggle time type between Wait, Followon and Alert.
PAGE 387
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Part 2 Column Input Function Attrib Move [MODIFY] Toggle between, AutoMark, GoOnGo and GoInB. Controls if moving devices will move on GO or when the step is loaded in B (next). ChTime [MODIFY] Shows the number of channel times in this step. Opens the channel time editor. MastLink [MODIFY] Shows the number of master links in this step. Opens the master link editor. MastPage [#] [MODIFY] Shows or edits which Master Page is linked.
PAGE 388
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequence and Preset texts In the sequence list you can see and edit both the unique sequence step text and the text belonging to the preset occupying a sequence step. • • Go to the Text column and press MODIFY to edit the sequence step text. Go to the P-Text column and press MODIFY to edit the Preset text.
PAGE 389
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Crossfade Movefade & Lockfade When you press RECORD to record a new Preset in a Sequence you will get the option to store it as a Crossfade, a Movefade or a Lockfade. Each of these modes affects how channels in that Preset will be played back when a the next crossfade is started. Function Shortcut Record a crossfade [RECORD] Record a Move Fade Feedback Normally a crossfade (x) is recorded.
PAGE 390
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • • • For a Lock fade, it is not possible to press PAUSE or GO BACK, since the nature is to "lock" the fade regardless of other playback controls. Stepping through the sequence with SEQ+/SEQ- or using GOTO will stop current Lock fades. If you start a move or lock fade on top of a crossfade, the crossfade now continues to run in the background and is also available for speed control on the display. Move and Lock fades are indicated with M and L in the Channel Views.
PAGE 391
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Times You can set times to a sequence step, and all channels and moving device parameters will follow that time. You can also set individual times in seconds, or as a percentage of the in- and delay times for each channel and moving device parameter in a sequence step. Times are set from, like this: 0.01 – 9.99. seconds to 49.59 minutes (0.1- 4959). It is possible to use hundreds of seconds as input during the first 10 seconds (v6.
PAGE 392
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequence Times - Main Times (in/out/delay/wait) Times are set to the step in A (Active) or B (Next) depending on the setting for times (SETUP & TIME). Function Key Feedback In time [#] [IN] A time is set for the incoming channels. Out time [#] [OUT] A time is set for the outgoing channels. In- and Out time [#] [TIME] A time is set for the in- and outgoing channels. Delay In time [#] [DELAY] & [IN] A delay time is set for the incoming channels.
PAGE 393
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequence Times - Channel Times Times are set to the step in A (Active) or B (Next) depending on the setting for times (SETUP & TIME). Function Soft Key Feedback 1. Select the TIME soft menu page TIMES (soft key) The time soft key page is selected in the main display. 2. Set a channel time for the selected channels [#] [CH_TIME] A time is set for the selected channels. You can set a text label to the channel time group. 3.
PAGE 394
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 This is how the time is indicated in the live channel view, under the level. NOTE When Channel Times are activated, the first four Channel Times are shown on the Main Display over the 4 wheels. The status for each Channel Time is displayed over each wheel. Rate for each channel can be adjusted with the corresponding wheel and the Channel Time can be started/stopped with the corresponding wheel key.
PAGE 395
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequence - Channel Time Editor press MODIFY in the ChTime column of the Sequence List to open the channel time editor. See Sequence List. Here you can add a text to each channel time group. This text is shown in the graphical time line view of the Playback list. Editing Channels in a Channel Time Group 1. Select the Group in the Channel Time Editor 2. Add or remove Channels. 3. Press UPDATE to store.
PAGE 396
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 The Time Editor Popup The Time Editor (also part of the Record popups Advanced tab) allows you to edit the times of any sequence step from a popup. Press MODIFY and TIME to open the Time Editor popup for the step in A or B (see NOTE below). Enter the number of a step first to open it for any step.
PAGE 397
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE The Time Editor follows the setting of the "Times in A/B" parameter in the Cobalt Setup (SETUP or F11). The WAF box allows you to toggle between Wait, Alert and Followon time for this step. The first six existing Channel Times can be edited directly in the Channel Times tab.
PAGE 398
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 The Times Soft Key Page The Time Soft Key Page is selected with the soft key TIMES in the Main Display of the console.
PAGE 399
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 These are the functions available. All times are set to the Main Playback. Function Softkey Feedback Channel time [#] [CH_TIME] Sets a channel time (#) to the selected channels. Channel delay [#] [CH_DELAY] Sets a channel delay time (#) to the selected channels. Wait [#] [WAIT] Sets a Wait time (#) to the Preset in A (or B). Out [#] [OUT] Sets an out time (#) to the Preset in A (or B). Delay out [#] [DELAY_OUT] Sets a Delay Out time (#) to the Preset in A (or B).
PAGE 400
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 There is a Learn Mode that will record Alert times automatically as a show is played back in real time by an operator. This mode is activated with the soft key LEARN ALERT in the Times Soft Key page. See The Times Soft Key Page. Time Limit There is both a visual and an audio warning set to alert 5 seconds before the next fade. You can change this time limit in the Time Settings. See Settings - Crossfade.
PAGE 401
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Crossfade Profiles You can record the movements of the A and B faders. When you start the crossfade the next time, the profile will be played back. 1. Start recording a profile by pressing the LEARN PROFILE soft key in the Times soft key page. See Times Soft Key Page. 2. The recording will stop when both faders reach their end position at the same time. A preview of the profile is shown in the timeline view.
PAGE 402
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Insert Step There are two ways of inserting a sequence step between two existing ones. • • Record a preset with a (decimal) number that fits between Insert any preset in the Sequence List (See Sequence List) Insert A Sequence Step - In any playback When you are working directly in a Playback and record a new preset, it is inserted numerically into the sequence of that Playback. Function Shortcut Feedback Insert Step [1] [.] [5] [RECORD] Inserts between 1 and 2.
PAGE 403
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Insert A Sequence Step - In The List Function Shortcut Feedback 1. Open the Sequence list [#] [SEQ] The List for sequence # is opened. 2. Move to the step you wish to insert a new step after Arrow Keys The selected step is highlighted in yellow. 3. Insert Preset # [#] [INSERT] The preset is inserted after the selected step NOTE You can use COPY, CUT and PASTE to insert and delete steps in the Sequence List as well. See Copy, Cut & Paste.
PAGE 404
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Delete Step Function Shortcut Feedback 1. Open the Sequence list [#] [SEQ] The List for sequence # is opened. 2. Select the step you wish to delete Arrow Keys The selected step is highlighted in yellow. 3. Delete the selected step [DELETE] You will get a popup where you can choose to delete this step and the related Preset. NOTE When you delete a Sequence Step all assigned times, links and texts are lost.
PAGE 405
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Links A sequence step can have a link to Master fades, a Master Page, a different sequence step (see NOTE in this explanation), and a Macro. All links are done in the Sequence List which can be opened with # SEQ or Browser >Main Show Data >Sequences >#. Sequence Step Links - Master Playbacks Master Links are loaded when the Sequence step is loaded to the B field. They are faded when GO is pressed or the crossfade faders are moved.
PAGE 406
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Function Key Feedback 1. Select MastLink column* Arrow keys The column is highlighted 2. Open Master Link List [MODIFY] The Master Link List is open. 3. Insert a link to Master # [#] [INSERT] Master # is linked, with its current content, and a target level of 100%. *In the Sequences - List. NOTE All functions in the Master Link list are the same as in the View Masters list. The only differing one is Target, which is the level the Master will fade to.
PAGE 407
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequence Step Links - Another Step NOTE Links to another sequence step are used mainly to create playback loops. Links are NOT used to change a playback order in Cobalt - this is done by cutting and pasting a step in a different location. See Copy, Cut & Paste. Function Column Feedback 1. Select the LinkTo column* Arrow keys The column is highlighted 2. Insert a link to Sequence [#] [MODIFY] Step # *In the Sequence List. 406 Sequence Step # is linked.
PAGE 408
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Load A Sequence can be loaded to the Main Playback, or any Master Playback. For information on how to control a Sequence once it is loaded, see Main Playback and Masters. Function Keys Feedback Load [#] [SEQ] & [PLAYBACK] Sequence # is loaded to the Main Playback. The light in A (Active) and B (Next) is not affected. Load to master [#] [SEQ] & [Master_Key] Sequence # is loaded to the Master Playback.
PAGE 409
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Build & Modify Modes There are two modes that affect recording and playback of Sequences. Build Sequence and Modify Sequence. The fastest way to toggle them on/off is with the context menu (right-click) on the header of the Playback Tab. Both can be set in System Settings as well. See System Settings - Crossfade.
PAGE 410
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequence - Build Sequence Mode This mode is set in the Crossfade Settings. See System Settings - Crossfade. The default setting for this mode is ON. When ON every Preset recorded in the Live or A tab will automatically be added to the Sequence in the Main Playback (in numerical order). The only reason to set this mode to OFF is when a Preset recorded in Live or A should NOT be added to the sequence in the Main Playback.
PAGE 411
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 The default setting for this mode is OFF. When turned ON all crossfade in Sequences will disregard Wait and Followon Times, Master Links, Master Pages, Links and other linked information. It is a mode created for rehearsals where only the main lighting changes are advanced manually.
PAGE 412
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Block Values It is possible to set a block for all track editing functions for a step in the Advanced tab of the Recording Popup or later, in the Sequence List.
PAGE 413
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 A block is indicated in the Playback List with a B after the Preset and a line over the step.In this image step 7 is blocked. NOTE Currently all intensities are blocked. To block the intensity for an individual channel set it to a different value from incoming or outgoing values (like 99% or 49%).
PAGE 414
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Track List It is possible to track edit intensities, channels, devices and attributes in Groups, Presets, Palettes and Sequences. All tracking features are described in the chapter Track List. See Track List.
PAGE 415
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Chase Mode A chase is a sequence set to chase mode, which means it will constantly loop during playback. See Sequences.
PAGE 416
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Chase - Introduction A Sequence can be set to run in Chase mode. This means the Sequence will chase endlessly through all Steps on the predefined times. There are several parameters that can affect how it will run in Chase mode. General Facts • • • • • • Chases are edited in the same way as Sequences. In addition to Sequences they have Rate and BPM. BPM can be set with TAP from the Master Playback. A Chase has playback modes such as Reverse, Bounce, Single Shot.
PAGE 417
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Chase - Playback View The Chase playback view is the same as the Sequence Playback view with some added functionality. The added chase functionality appears under the sequence name display in the top of the Playback view. The functions are described in The Sequences List Columns as well as the rest of this chapter.
PAGE 418
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Chase - Playback Modes There are three modes that affect the playback of a chase. Mode Where Function Reverse Set in The Sequences List Reverses the chase direction. Columns Bounce Set in The Sequences List Makes the chase reverse direction Columns every second time. Single Shot Set in The Sequences List The chase will run one time and stop.
PAGE 419
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Chase - Set Rate You can set a rate 1-1000% for a Chase. It will scale all times proportionally. Action Keys Feedback 1. Open the Sequences list [SEQ] The Sequences List is opened. 2. Step to the Rate cell for a Arrow Keys chase The cell is highlighted. 3. Enter a new Rate The Rate # is assigned to this Chase. All fade times are proportionally scaled.
PAGE 420
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Chase - BPM & Tap Tempo You can set the tempo/speed to a chaser in BPM. This can be set numerically in the Sequences tab (Browser >Main Show Data >Sequences) or using the Tap Tempo function. Set BPM Numerically Action Keys Feedback 1. Open the Sequences list [SEQ] The Sequences List is opened. 2. Step to the BPM cell for a chase Arrow Keys The cell is highlighted. 3. Enter a new BPM [#] [MODIFY] The BPM # is assigned to this Chase.
PAGE 421
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Chase - Wizard The Chase Wizard can create a chase sequence from a channel selection. It is activated from within the Sequences List. Action Keys Feedback 1. Open the Sequences list [SEQ] The Sequences List is opened. 2. Open the Chase Wizard [WIZARD] The Chase Wizard is opened. The next free Sequence number is suggested. 3. Select channels and set levels Channel functions The current channel selection from Live is automatically loaded. Change if wanted to. 4.
PAGE 422
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 423
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Chase Wizard - Functions Column Input Function Number of steps [#] [MODIFY] The number of steps the Chase shall have. Channels per step [#] [MODIFY] The number of channels you wish to have in each step Step time [#] [MODIFY] Default wait time for each step. Can be edited after. Chase number [#] [MODIFY] The number this Chase will have. Next free is suggested. Start at preset [#] [MODIFY] The Preset number this Chase will use for the steps.
PAGE 424
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Split Fade There is a setting in the Mode cell of each step in the Sequence List that allows you to set the fade mode to S (Split) in which there will be no dipless calculation between the crossfaders - allowing for a blackout by moving each fader to zero.
PAGE 425
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Drag And Drop There are many ways of moving around data in a sequence. Drag and drop is one of them. It can be useful if you want to reorganize the order of your sequence steps, or for example if you want to move an attribute link from one step to another.
PAGE 426
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 427
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 428
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 In all three cases you will get the following dialogue: This dialogue allows you to COPY or MOVE the selected step. COPY = Makes a copy of the source and inserts it into the sequence after the target step. MOVE = Moves the source and inserts it into the sequence after the target step.
PAGE 429
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 If you select the Advanced tab by pressing left arrow you get the following options: The first option allows you to define where you want to copy/move the step to. • • • After the target step (default) Before the target step Replace the target step The second option "Create Between" allows you to create a new step with a new preset number and insert (after/before).
PAGE 430
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Drag and Drop Device Attributes Moving and copying device links in a sequence can be done in the organizer, or in the main playback tab. Organizer 1. Open the Organizer tab (Browser >Main Show Data >Organizer (1 tab)) and expand the sequence nodes.
PAGE 431
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 2. Left-click, hold and drag the Devices node from step 2 to step 1, and drop. This will give you a dialogue: Your options are to either copy, or move the device link you just dragged. NOTE You can drag all devices, devices of the same type or just a single device depending on where you click when you drag.
PAGE 432
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Main Playback Tab In the main Playback Tab, left-click, hold and drag devices in the device cell of a sequence step to another step and drop to get the same dialogue as when you drag and drop in the Organizer as described above.
PAGE 433
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequences - Section Markers You can organize the contents of a sequence visually by setting section markers that will provide a blue heading. In addition to this you can jump between section markers. The quickest way to apply or remove a section marker is using the context menu (right-click over a sequence step in the Playback tab).
PAGE 434
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 You can see and set the section markers in the sequence editor as well - in the column at the far right AND you can set the section marker also when you record a new preset in the sequence from the Advanced Record dialogue.
PAGE 435
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 436
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 437
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Playlist The Playlist allows you to arrange the order in which sequences are loaded to the main playback. 1. Make sure you have some sequences to arrange in the playlist. 2. Open the Playlist editor The Playlist is opened from Browser >Main Show Data >Playlist. These are the functions in the Playlist.
PAGE 438
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 3. Activate Playlist Mode from the Misc Soft Key Page (see below). NOTE You can reset the Playlist to strart from the top at anytime by holding C and pressing PLAYLIST in the Misc Soft Key Page. The Playlist - Mode The PLAYLIST allows you to activate Playlist mode for playback of a number of sequences in a predefined order in the main playback.
PAGE 439
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 The Playlist - Console Display Hold [<--] and press the softkey PLAYLIST in the Misc soft key page to activate the Playlist in the main display. You can select any sequence with the trackball in DispList mode with the DispList wheel, and activate with DispSel.
PAGE 440
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Groups/Palettes Overview This is an overview showing both Groups and Palettes of all types (Focus, Color, Beam, All) in the same tab. Open from the Browser >Main Show Data >Group/Palette Overview. • • • Press MODIFY to activate a selected item. Press TRACK to track a selected item. Press MODIFY to edit a name.
PAGE 441
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 442
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 >Settings & Tools - Main Show Data These are the settings and tools for Main Show Data.
PAGE 443
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Fade Curves It is possible to create and assign fade curves to each crossfade. It is possible to create any kind of curve in the Fade Curve Editor. The curves affect intensities, not Moving Device attributes. Action Key Feedback 1. Open the Fade Curve List Browser >Main Show Data >Settings and Tools >Fade Curves The Fade Curve List is opened. 2. Insert a New Curve [INSERT] A new curve is inserted. You can name it in the Name cell. 3.
PAGE 444
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Fade Curve Editor (example: fast Top Curve) Action Key Feedback 4. Insert a position [INSERT] A position is inserted. You can set percent, Output and if this step should use interpolation to the next step.
PAGE 445
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequence - Assign Fade Curves Assign curves to a sequence step in the Sequence Editor. Action Key Feedback 1. Open the Sequence Editor [MODIFY] & [PLAYBACK] The Sequence List is opened. 2. Move to the column "Fade Curve" Arrow Keys The cell is highlighted 3. Open the Fade Curve popup [MODIFY] The popup is opened. If no curves are defined it will only have "No curve". 4. Select a Curve Arrow keys The selected curve is highlighted 5.
PAGE 446
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Notes Editor A NOTE allows you to add a comment and a color code to any Sequence Step, Group, Preset or Palette. All Notes are summarized in a list with a time and user stamp - and a direct link to the object the Note is attached to. • • • • All Notes are tagged with a time stamp, and the user login of the operator. Notes are shown in the Playback View with Flags. The color of these flags can be set in the Notes Editor.
PAGE 447
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Notes - Editor Open the Notes Editor by holding MODIFY and pressing NOTE or from the Browser (Browser >Main Show Data >Settings and Tools >Note Editor). You can change the color of the NOTE flag in the far right column of this editor. Note Editor - Columns These are the columns in the Note Editor. Column Input Function TimeStamp [MODIFY] The time stamp of this Note - Press MODIFY to open the editor for this object.
PAGE 448
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 *The color flag is shown for Notes in the Playback View, and the text is shown to the left of the graphical view of the crossfade. Note Editor - Delete Notes are deleted in the Note Editor. 1. Open the editor. See Notes - Editor. 2. Select the Note with arrow keys. 3. Press DELETE. The Note is deleted.
PAGE 449
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Delete Wizard The Delete Wizard allows you to delete bulk data in your play. It is opened from the Browser >Main Show Data >Settings and Tools >Delete Wizard. There are two tabs.
PAGE 450
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 451
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Auto-create Content Wizard... This wizard allows you to generate palettes and groups for each range for selected parameters in the currently selected devices. Ranges with the same name will be merged together in the same palette. You can specify the starting number for newly generated palettes. Open in the Browser from Browser >Main Show Data>Settings and Tools >Auto-create Content Wizard...
PAGE 452
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 453
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels Every dimmer or device controlled from Cobalt is selected and controlled by its channel number.
PAGE 454
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Introduction A channel is the "handle" you call upon to control any dimmer or device connected to the system. Dimmer channel formats. Device channel formats Channels are selected with the channel functions of the programming section. The Channel Control functions are mapped to any section of the console at any time - for example pressing LIVE connects to the A field of the Main Playback, pressing BLIND connects to the Blind field.
PAGE 455
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Functions These are the channel functions.
PAGE 456
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Views Channels (dimmers and devices) are displayed in channel views. 1. 2. 3. 4. This is the Live tab in Channels mode Settings - expand/compress level of detail, switch palette name or number Live tab in Attributes mode for devices.
PAGE 457
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 A Channel View like the Live Tab shows only channels, but a channel view can also be a part of editors like the Preset Editor, the Sequence Editor, Effect Editors etc. Channel views can show channel intensities, palettes and attributes. They have different levels of detail and can be zoomed. For more information see Navigating - Channel Views and Live Introduction.
PAGE 458
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Navigating - Channel Views The FORMAT key is one of the main keys used to navigate in the Channel Views. The channel symbols and formats are described in another chapter.
PAGE 459
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 460
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel View Formats - Selected Only selected channels are shown. (Pressing FORMAT toggles through the formats.) Channel View Format - Selected and non-zero Selected and non-zero channels are shown. (Pressing FORMAT toggles through the formats.) Hold FORMAT and press CHANNEL to select this format directly.
PAGE 461
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel View Format - Selected And Captured Selected and captured channels are shown. (Pressing FORMAT toggles through the formats.) Hold FORMAT and press CAPTURE to select this format directly. See Channels - Capture Mode. Channel View Format - Used In Play Only channels recorded in some way in this play are shown. (Pressing FORMAT toggles through the formats).
PAGE 462
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel View Format - Layout The last selected Channel Layout is shown. (# FORMAT selects Layout #.) If there are no Layouts stored in the show, this screen will not appear.
PAGE 463
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel View Zoom Hold FORMAT and use the wheel to Zoom in/out. (You can hold FORMAT (F4) and then right-click and drag with mouse as well). NOTE Hold C & FORMAT to reset the zoom factor.
PAGE 464
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Command Syntaxes (RPN/At Mode) Depending on where you come from you will be accustomed to some kind of command syntax. In Cobalt it is possible to do most of your design and programming without having to worry about this, since most functions are available directly on the screens. However, for traditional number crunching of lights and levels it makes a difference. There are two options. Rpn and At Mode.
PAGE 465
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Select Channels The fastest way to select a channel and set a level regardless of syntax is to enter the number of that channel and move the level wheel. This is a table with the key entries for most channel commands. See also Multicell Devices.
PAGE 466
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Selecting Decimal Channels (7.1) Channel RPN AT MODE Select complete device [1] [CHANNEL] [1] Select only base channel [1] [.] [0] [CHANNEL] [1] [.] [0] Select only decimal channels [1] [.] [1] [CHANNEL] [1] [.] [1] Invert base/decimal [INVERT] & [.] [INVERT] & [.] Set Channel Levels Once a channel(s) is selected you can set levels in the following ways.
PAGE 467
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 *This is the Step Level value of the SETUP for the Level key. You can change it by holding SETUP and pressing @LEVEL. NOTE There is a function for setting the last recorded level, and for fetching levels from any recorded Preset. See Presets - Fetch Intensities Park Level You can set a channel at a constant level. It will not be affected by any other controls (including the Grand Master). See Park.
PAGE 468
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Ch Only Mode The CH ONLY MODE key in the programming section allows a complete novice to get some lights on stage. It converts all 40 Playback faders to channel faders temporarily, actually turning the console into a single scene board. Action Console Feedback 1. Make sure the Grand Master is up Grand Master Otherwise there is no light output 2. Make sure the FREEZE switch is set to ON Freeze Switch Otherwise there is static, or no light output 3.
PAGE 469
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - 8 bit 256 Step Levels You can work with 8 bit 256 step levels. Action Key Feedback Increase 1 bit [.] & [+%] As long as the decimal point is held, pressing +% will add one bit step to the selected channels Decrease 1 bit [.
PAGE 470
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Capture Mode The CAPTURE key in the programming section allows you to capture a channel or device and control and record it regardless of where it is output from in the system. Captured levels are considered to be changed at all times and will be recorded into Presets accordingly. A Catpured channel/device stays this way until released with the RELEASE key.
PAGE 471
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Permanent Capture Mode While Capture mode is activated, all channels that are changed are automatically captured. Action Key Feedback Activate [CAPTURE] [CAPTURE] Capture will light up. All channels that are selected and changed will remain at that level until released. Deactivate [CAPTURE] [CAPTURE] Capture light goes off. Captured channels remain captured until released. Captured channels will have a red background for the channel number.
PAGE 472
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Recording only Captured channels You can record only captured channels. Action Key Feedback Record captured [RECORD] & [CAPTURE] Levels and parameters of only captured channels are recorded. Releasing Captured Channels Captured channels are released back to the sum of all playbacks, this can be done on time. Action Key Feedback Selected [RELEASE] The selected channel intensities are released, regardless if Capture is active or not.
PAGE 473
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Clear Functions The C/Alt key in the programming section is used in combination with other keys to quickly clear different playback areas of content. These functions can be used to clear channels and levels Action Key Feedback Clear selected [C/Alt] [C/Alt] All channels in the contributing field of the channel view connected to the channel control are deselected. Clear A [C/Alt] & [LIVE] All channels in the A field are set to zero and deselected.
PAGE 474
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Home Attribute functions Action Key Feedback Clear [C/Alt] & [HOME_ATTRIB] Homes all attributes and clears all Dynamics. Clear [C/Alt] & [HOME_ATTRIB] [HOME_ATTRIB] Homes all attributes and clears all Dynamics and intensities.
PAGE 475
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Check Mode The CHECK +/- keys in the programming section are used for stepping through a series of channels at any selected level. If a channel is already set to a level when checked it will cut back to the previous level when the next channel is checked. Action Key Feedback 1. Select start channel and set a level [#] Level_Wheel This level will be used by check mode. 2.
PAGE 476
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Balance Mode The BALANCE key in the Soft Keys makes it possible to temporarily set all channels to 0% except a selection, to be able to work with that selection. The original output of the subdued channels is restored when Balance Mode is exited.
PAGE 477
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 As soon as balance mode is activated, it is indicated at the top of all screens. Action Key Feedback See Channel Command Syntax 1. Select the channels to work with 2. Activate Balance Mode [BALANCE] All other channels in the channel view will be set to 0% temporarily. You can now work with the selected channels. 3. Exit Balance Mode [BALANCE] The channel levels that were muted are restored. NOTE It is not possible to use RECORD when Balance mode is active.
PAGE 478
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Scale channel levels The SCALE key in the Soft Keys makes it possible to apply a scaling factor to the intensity level of any channel/device. (Soft Key Pages are commands in the lower right corner of screen 2) When 100%, channels are controlled and played back at normal or recorded levels. Scale settings other than 100% will proportionally inhibit or boost the intensity output by the channel.
PAGE 479
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Scaling with the SCALE soft key 1. Hold the SCALE soft key in the Channels Soft key page of the main display. The channel view will show the scale levels. 2. Use the level wheel to set the scale level 0-200% for the selected channel(s). No scale is shown as "---". A channel with a scaled level gets a symbol next to the level, and the scale leve is shown in the INFO area of the Browser when the channel is selected.
PAGE 480
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Scaling from the channel list Action Key Feedback 1. Open the Channel List [MODIFY] & [CHANNEL] The Channel List is opened and focused at the channel with that number. 2. Select the channel [#] Channel is selected. 3. Move to the Scale column Arrow keys 4. Set a Scale level [#] [MODIFY] [CHANNEL] All levels of this channel will be multiplied by the Scale factor. A +/- symbol will be shown next to the level. Set 100% to remove the Scale factor.
PAGE 481
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Used & Unused You can create a selection of channels based on if they are used or not in the sequence loaded to the Main Playback. Action Key Feedback 1. Open the Channel Selection Wizard [WIZARD] & [CHANNEL] A popup with the Channel select wizard is opened. 2. Select UNUSED or USED [MODIFY] This is a choice in the dropdown menu. 3. Select the Start and Stop Arrow keys ranges This is default set to the first and last step of the Sequence. 4.
PAGE 482
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Group Wheel Mode The GROUPWHEEL key in the Soft Keys makes it possible to assign a different/overlapping channel group to each wheel under the Main Display. All wheels interact inside the A field of the Live tab on a Latest Takes Precedence basis.
PAGE 483
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 With groups loaded Load channels Action Key Feedback Load selected [PRESET] & [Wheel_Key] The selected channels are loaded as a channel group to the wheel. Load selected [GROUP] & [Wheel_Key] The selected channels are loaded as a channel group to the wheel. Load group [#] [GROUP] & [Wheel_Key] The channels of Group # are loaded to the wheel. Load selected [CHANNEL] & [Wheel_Key] The selected channels are loaded as a channel group to the wheel. Load channel...
PAGE 484
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Rem Dim The REM DIM key in the programming section will set all channels in the Channel Control to zero, except the currently selected channel(s). Function Key Feedback Dim remaining [REM_DIM] All channels in the Channel Control are set to zero, except the current selection. NOTE It is possible to set the REM DIM key to function as BALANCE. This is done in the System Settings.
PAGE 485
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Soft key page The CHANNELS soft key page provides a number of functions that are useful when working with channel intensities.
PAGE 486
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Functions Function Soft Key Feedback Compare mode [Compare] Activates Compare mode. See Presets - Compare mode Balance mode [Balance] Activates Balance mode. See Channels - Balance mode Data [Data] Toggles if console displays and monitor screens display absolute device data or references to palettes. Mark [Mark] Sets a Mark level to the selected device(s). See Active Mode & Mark Scale [Scale] Activates Scale when held. See Channels - Scale channel levels.
PAGE 487
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Next & Last Mode The NEXT and LAST keys in the programming section will sub-select singel channels in the current channel selection, in the order they were selected. The focused channel is mapped to intensity and parameter controls so you can adjust it individually. Press SELECT ALL to exit Next/Last mode. Action Key Feedback Activate Next/Last [NEXT] The first channel in the current channel selection is marked as red, and mapped to the level and device controls.
PAGE 488
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE Next/Last and Highlight Mode are often used in combination for focusing single channels within a channel selection. See Highlight Mode When you focus a channel with NEXT/LAST, it will be shown with number and name in the Information area of the Browser.
PAGE 489
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channels - Select Functions The select functions allow you to select odds, evens, randoms and more from any channel selection.
PAGE 490
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Select - Sub-selection Functions In all cases below - Press SELECT ALL to return to the original selection. Function Soft Key Feedback Every 2nd [Select_2nd] Every second channel from the current channel selection is selected. Use NEXT/LAST to step. Every 3rd [Select_3rd] Every third channel from the current channel selection is selected. Use NEXT/LAST to step. Every # th * [#] [Select_Nth] Every # th channel from the current channel selection is selected.
PAGE 491
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Function Soft Key Feedback Random 2nd [RANDOM] & [SELECT_2nd] Every random 2nd is selected. Random 3rd [RANDOM] & [SELECT_3rd] Every random 3rd is selected. Random Nth [RANDOM] & [SELECT_Nth] Every random Nth is selected.
PAGE 492
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Live The Live tab is the most fundamental tab, where you can view and edit values for channels and devices "live".
PAGE 493
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Live - Introduction Live is the main Channel view where you can control and view the live output of all channels and devices. The Live tab shows all channel levels, no matter where they are output from. If you add channel intensities they will be output from the Active field of the Main Playback (A). NOTE The Live Tab cannot be closed with ESC unless it is unlocked. To unlock hold SETUP and press TAB when it is selected.
PAGE 494
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Selecting channels with mouse Click on a channel to select or deselect it, and hold SHIFT and click on a channel to make a THRU function. In channel layouts you can click on a bar or box to select all channel on/in it. Double-click a channel to select just that channel.
PAGE 495
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 You can drag and drop channels between channel views, and to masters. All intensities will be copied. Channel viewing formats All channel views have a variety of viewing formats (selected, non-zero etc). The currently selected format is indicated in the top right corner of each Channel View. To read more about the viewing formats see Navigating - Channel views.
PAGE 496
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • • • All channels (FORMAT & ALL) All non-zero channels (FORMAT & CH) Captured channels (FORMAT & CAPTURE) Parked channels (FORMAT & PARK) NOTE SELECTED AND USED IN PLAY = Shows channels that are recorded in presets and Groups. If you select previously not recorded channels, they will be shown in this view. But, when you select this format the next time, a new scan through all groups and presets will be made and they will disappear again if they don’t have recorded levels.
PAGE 497
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE Hold C & FORMAT to reset the zoom factor. Channel Information - Info Box Under the Browser there is an INFO box which will show information for the currently selected channel(s). It is possible to use NEXT/LAST to focus a single channel within a selection and get the channel info.
PAGE 498
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 The following information is shown • • • • • • • Text A-D for the channel Template name. If a dimmer curve is assigned. The Dimmer/Device Addresses. Park status. More than one channel select is shown as “x channels selected”. If there are dimmer errors reported for a channel. Multiple Live Tabs It is possible to open several Live tabs. They can be set to operate individually, or linked to the same channel pool - synchronising to show as many channels as possible at all times.
PAGE 499
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Editing in Live All controls of the console are available for editing when Live is active. Select channels and/or devices and you can • • • Set/change intensities with level wheel or level keys Change parameters with parameter wheels Activate palettes with palette keys and/or direct selects Intensities = HTP Intensities are added to the output in the A field of the main playback. The levels are piled by Highest Takes Precedence (HTP)on top of the output from all playbacks.
PAGE 500
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record in Live Recording You can record in Live directly to the sequence in the main playback, directly to a master, or to Preset. Action Key Feedback Record Live [RECORD] A popup will ask you to confirm that the content of Live is recorded to the next free preset of the sequence in the main playback. Record to a Master [RECORD] & [Master_Key] A popup will ask you to confirm that the selected channels are recorded to the next free preset in that Master Playback.
PAGE 501
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Symbols In every Channel View there are channel and device symbols with indicators for basic modes and content. Basic indications Indicator Screen Explanation Selected and HTP A gold frame shows that a channel is selected. If a master is source the level is shown in yellow (channel 6). The top right corner shows the source of the current highest level* Changed values A magenta background indicates that a level or parameter type has changed.
PAGE 502
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device channel formats Similar to dimmer channels, except there is additional information about the device template and Focus, Color and Beam palettes and activity. If the device has color mixing there is a color preview to the left of the channel number showing the current mix. You can toggle if palette names or number are shown by holding FORMAT and pressing left/right arrow.
PAGE 503
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Information - Important Level Modes These are the different modes and functions that can "steal" or "filter" the levels and parameters of a channel or device. Function Screen examples Explanation Captured A red background for the channel number indicates attributes are captured. A red background for the level indicates the level is captured. Parked The background of all information is dimmed. "PARK" is indicated at the top of all screens.
PAGE 504
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Information - Fade indications Channel information for fades are only shown in the Live channel view and are all related to the sequence in the main playback. Function Screen Explanation Fade direction The arrow indicates what it will do on pressing GO, not necessarily what it is doing right now. Up = blue arrow Down = green arrow No indication means it is not changing.
PAGE 505
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Blind The Blind tab allows you to view and edit values for channels and devices blind.
PAGE 506
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Blind - Introduction Blind is a channel tab where you can control any channels and devices blind. • • • Create a look blind and load or record to any playback. Load the content of any playback to Blind, and load the content of Blind to any playback. Record the content of Blind. Select the Blind Tab Pressing BLIND will select the blind tab, and allow you to edit channels and devices without affecting the output.
PAGE 507
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 508
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Editing In Blind Most normal controls of the console are available for editing in Blind.
PAGE 509
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record and copy in Blind Recording You can record from Blind directly to a master, or to Preset. Action Key Feedback Record to a Master [RECORD] & [Master_Key] A popup will ask you to confirm that the content of Blind is recorded to that Master Playback. Record Blind [RECORD] A popup will ask you to confirm that the content of Blind is recorded to the next free preset. Update Preset [UPDATE] A popup will ask you to confirm updating the preset currently loaded to Blind.
PAGE 510
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Track List It is possible to track intensities, channels, devices and attributes in Groups, Presets, Palettes and Sequences.
PAGE 511
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Track - Introduction Press TRACK to track the current channel selection in the sequence of the main playback. It is possible to Track a channel/moving device selection with attributes through Play data (Presets, Groups, Palettes, Sequences. It is also possible from the Browser, to track Presets and Palettes.
PAGE 512
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE You can press MODIFY in the first column of any track list to open the corresponding editor for that item. There is a limit of 30 columns of data in all Track Lists to avoid creating huge spreadsheets if many channels with many parameters are selected. As long as a Track List is open the tracking commands UPDATE & @LEVEL and UPDATE & ATTRIB are blocked to avoid confusion.
PAGE 513
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Track - Lists Press TRACK to open the track list. Any selection of channels/effect playbacks can be tracked. Once the Track List is opened you can • • • • • View and edit levels directly. Select multiple cells by holding SELECT and using arrow keys. Press DELETE to delete the data in a cell. Enter a number and press MODIFY to set referenced data like palettes for parameters. Enter a number, hold C/ALT and press MODIFY to set absolute data for parameters.
PAGE 514
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Track List - Functions Column Action Feedback Step [MODIFY] Opens the Sequence List focused at this Step. Preset [MODIFY] Opens the Preset List focused at this Preset. Text No Input Shows the Step Text. Mode [MODIFY] Opens the Sequence List focused at this Preset. Devices [MODIFY] Opens the Preset Attribute List for this Preset. Channel/Device cells [#] [MODIFY] Sets an intensity or reference data for the selected cells.
PAGE 515
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Track List - Show Levels & Attributes In all Track Lists with attributes, the attributes and levels can be toggled on/off with the following functions. Function Column Feedback Levels [FORMAT] & [@LEVEL] The intensity column is toggled. Focus attributes [FORMAT] & [FOCUS] The Focus parameter columns are toggled. Color attributes [FORMAT] & [COLOR] The Color parameter columns are toggled. Beam attributes [FORMAT] & [BEAM] The Beam parameter columns are toggled.
PAGE 516
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Track - Channels The current channel selection can be tracked in Sequences, Chases, Presets, Groups and all kinds of Palettes (Focus, Color, Beam & All). Once the channel(s) are selected there is a key combination of TRACK and some other key to activate the corresponding tracking tab. You can delete attribute values by pressing DELETE in a cell. There is no undo for this. (5.0) Track Channels - In Sequences Track the current channel selection in a Sequence or Chase.
PAGE 517
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 See Track Channels - Show Levels & Attributes. Track To Wizard If you press WIZARD on a level in a sequence step, you will get a popup where you can select up to which Sequence Step the same level should be changed (= Tracked To). Track Channels - In Presets Track the current channel selection in all Presets. Function Key Feedback Presets [TRACK] & [PRESET] Track List for Presets is opened See Track Channels - Show Levels & Attributes.
PAGE 518
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Track Channels - Groups Track the current channel selection in all Groups. Function Key Feedback Groups [TRACK] & [GROUP] Track List for Groups is opened* Track Channels - Palettes Track the current channel selection in Palettes (Focus, Color, Beam, All). See Track Channels - Show Levels & Attributes.
PAGE 519
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Track Channels - In The Play Track the current channel selection in Sequences, Presets, Groups and Palettes.
PAGE 520
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 521
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Track - Presets A Preset can be tracked through the current Play. The TRACK function used in the Browser will produce a listing of all sequences and steps where that Preset is used in the current play. Track a Preset in the Browser Select the preset under the Preset Node in the Browser (F10) and press TRACK (F12) or use the context menu Track command (SELECT SELECT or right-click). Track list for tracking Preset 3.
PAGE 522
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE The Track command can only be used on objects within the current play and not in the Organizer (Import From) tab.
PAGE 523
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Track - Palettes All types of Palettes can be tracked through the current Play. This is done by selecting the Palette in the Palette node of the Browser (F10) and pressing TRACK. Function Key Feedback 1. Open the "Palettes" node See Navigating in the Browser Browser Palettes node is selected and opened 2. Open a Palette type (Focus, Color, Beam, All) See Navigating Browser A Palette node is selected and opened 3.
PAGE 524
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Track - Track Editing Track editing is a very powerful way to edit in a Sequence and very similar to how editing is done in a "tracking style console". It are used to save time when the same type of change is wanted in a series of Presets. There are some simple rules and they are described in this chapter. Pressing TRACK opens the track list. Holding UPDATE and pressing @LEVEL or ATTRIB will initiate the track editing dialog.
PAGE 525
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE Each channel will be tracked individually until the position where the level changes value. Dialog shows the number of channels that will be affected. A step in the sequence set to Block Tracking will prevent levels from tracking through. To set a block on individual channels in a step – set the intensity to 1% higher or lower on those channels you wish to block.
PAGE 526
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record if Active updates many presets, forwards, backwards or in both directions from the current preset, until a different value or a block instruction is encountered. 3. Confirm. NOTE If you have RECORD set to ACTIVE the console will insert data where required in previous and7or subsequent steps when this editing is used.
PAGE 527
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 3. Make your selection and confirm. All redundant parameters will be deleted.
PAGE 528
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Parked Park allow you to Park any part of a channel or device at a constant value. The Park status is stored with the play. Keyboard shortcut = Z.
PAGE 529
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Park - Introduction The PARK key is used in combination with other keys to park data. Park allows you to Park the output of any part of a channel or device at a constant value. • Parked values are indicated with PARK in the Channel view and the Info box of the Browser when the channel is selected. • • A parked channel or parameter can still be altered and recorded blind. Park can be held and used with @LEVEL CH ATTRIB FOCUS COLOR BEAM U1-U3 Wheel parameter keys.
PAGE 530
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Park - Parking values The PARK key is used to park channels, parameter groups (F, C, B) or parameters. The Parked status is indicated in the status part at the top of the screens in blue, in the Live channel view for each channel ("PARK") and in the attribute views (dimmed). There is a Parked items list that is opened with MODIFY & PARK. You can hold PARK and press several different values consequently.
PAGE 531
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE PARK applies to the selected cells when an Attribute View is open.
PAGE 532
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Park - Edit Parked Values Parked values can be edited in the PARK column of the Channel and Output lists. Select the cell, enter a value and press MODIFY (or click). Channel List Open by holding MODIFY and press CHANNEL. See Patch - Channel List. Output List Open from Browser (Browser >Settings & Tools >Output Lists >). See Patch - Output List.
PAGE 533
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Park - Un-parking Values The UNPARK key is used in combination with other keys to unpark values. The Parked status is indicated in the Live channel view ("PARK") and in the attribute views (dimmed). The key UNPARK is also available in the Misc Soft Key Menu. You can hold the soft key UNPARK (Misc) and press several different items consequently.
PAGE 534
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 [C/Alt] & [PARK] or [UNPARK] & [CHANNEL] There is a Parked items list that is opened with MODIFY & PARK where it is possible to un-park as well with DELETE. See Park - Parked Items List.
PAGE 535
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Park - Parked Items List Hold MODIFY and press PARK to open the Parked Items List. & The Parked Items list shows all parked channels, intensities and attributes. Individual items can be unparked by selecting the appropriate row and pressing [DELETE]. See Parked.
PAGE 536
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 >Settings and Tools - Channels These are the functions in the Settings and Tools node for Channels in the Browser.
PAGE 537
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Database You can give each channel up to four text labels (ABCD). From these texts "auto-groups" are automatically created. The auto-groups are available from the Direct Selects and in the Cobalt from the Name List in the Main Display (DISP MODE & CHANNEL CH). Any moving device that is patched will automatically show up on the Name List as well, which allows you to select all "Stage Zooms" or "Scrollers" without creating any groups in advance.
PAGE 538
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Method 2 In the Channel Database with a Wizard Action Key Feedback 1. Select text column Select any cell(s) in the Cell is highlighted ABCD columns 2. Open the Wizard [WIZARD] Text Wizard is opened 3.
PAGE 539
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Action Key Feedback 4. Enter Text Text cell Select text cell, Press MODIFY, enter a text and press MODIFY again to confirm. 5. Confirm Execute button Select Execute, Press MODIFY to confirm. Action Key Feedback 1. Select channels Channel functions Channels are highlighted in yellow 2. Open Text Wizard [CHANNEL] & [TEXT] Text Wizard is opened. You can set text ABCD and EXECUTE.
PAGE 540
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE You will not get a warning if you are overwriting existing texts.
PAGE 541
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Auto Groups - From Database and Templates The Auto Groups are channel handles that are created automatically for any type of device patched in the device list, and for the different text lables assigned in the Channel Database. For example, if you patch a moving device with the template "VL2500Spot", an autogroup with this name will appear in the Direct Selects for Auto Groups. Click to select all patched devices of this type. See Auto Groups in Cobalt Direct Selects - Types of Data.
PAGE 542
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 The file has to have the ending .txt and is opened from the Browser (Browser >File >Import from...). Follow the instructions (1, 2, 3) and import the texts. You can save your mapping and reuse if you want to import a similar file later. 1. Select the delimiter used by the file you are importing. 2. Select which columns that should be mapped to the internal channel database fields. 3. If you want, choose to store the mappings under a given name for later reuse.
PAGE 543
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Field description Setting Feedback Text file format Choose if the file you are importing is tab or comma delimited. Map to columns Channel numbers, and text to each column. Use column headers in Channel Database The source file headers will be displayed instead of TEXT A, B, C, D. Use existing mapping Use this mapping or select a previously stored mapping. Save as new mapping Save this mapping for later use. Name for new mapping Name for this mapping when saving.
PAGE 544
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • • • Text A= Purpose Text B= Position Text C= Color & Template Text D= Type & Wattage Uncheck Parentheses Lightwright seems to by default use parentheses (#) on channel numbers. So channel 1 in Lightwright is (1). When you export the data from LightWright, in Export options, check the option "Strip channel parentheses ()". If you do not check this option, the channel will be exported with the parentheses and Cobalt will not understand that it is a channel number.
PAGE 545
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Layouts A Channel Layout is a topographical custom view of your whole lighting rig, or part of it. It can also contain show data.
PAGE 546
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Layouts - Introduction You can have up to 999 custom Channel Layouts in addition to the normal channel views. This is an example of some instrument symbols in a Channel Layout.
PAGE 547
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • • • • • • There are USITT plot symbols for different light sources They can contain any type of data besides channels FORMAT is used to open a Channel Layout Channel Layouts can be assigned to Master Playbacks Use Arrow Keys and level wheel to move around in a layout (5.0) Zoom (FORMAT & level wheel) will zoom to the selected channel (5.0) Channels can be selected by dragging a frame around them with a mouse (5.
PAGE 548
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Layouts - Load and navigate These are the functions you need to load and navigate layouts in a channel view. Function Key Feedback Load [#] [FORMAT] Channel Layout # is loaded in the currently selected Channel View. Hide symbols [FORMAT] & [Right_Arrow] All channel symbols are set to the standard symbol of Cobalt. Show symbols [FORMAT] & [Left_Arrow] All channel symbols from the Channel Layout are shown. Zoom [FORMAT] & [level_wheel] Zoom in layout.
PAGE 549
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Layouts - List Enter a number (#) and press INSERT to create a Channel Layout in the Channel layout list (Browser >Channels >Settings & Tools >Channel Layout).
PAGE 550
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Layout List - Columns & Functions Function Key Channel layout Feedback The ID of each Layout. Cannot be changed. Text [MODIFY] Press MODIFY to activate and end text input. This text is shown in the lower right corner of the channel views. Auto Selectable [MODIFY] Enables Auto-Select* Delete Layout [DELETE] Deletes the currently selected Channel Layout. Cannot be undone.
PAGE 551
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Layouts - Editor This is where you create and edit a Channel Layout. It is opened from: Browser >Channels >Settings & Tools >Channel Layout >#.
PAGE 552
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Layout Editor - General Functions The Channel Layout Editor requires a mouse or trackball. Select objects in the upper area and action in the toolbar. Each function is described in the following chapters. • • • Select ARROW to select or edit objects. Select OBJECT and type to insert objects. Select a channel and set a level to check live. These are general functions. Function Key Feedback Insert # Mouse click Item # is inserted at the cursor.
PAGE 553
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Layout Editor - Wheels The wheels are used to spread the selected objects horizontally or vertically, and to change size or rotation. 1. Select objects (Cursor mode). 2. Use wheel to edit. Function Feedback Stretch H Objects are spread horizontally Stretch V Objects are spread vertically Size Object size is changed Rotate Object is rotated. Hold C to rotate individual objects within selection.
PAGE 554
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Layout Editor - Colors It is possible to set Foreground and Background color for all objects. 1. Select object. 2. Select Foreground or Background color (deselect object to view colors) Channel Layout Editor - Align There are different align options for a selection of objects. 1. Select objects 2. Click on ALIGN to get the Align popup.
PAGE 555
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 3. Make selection and confirm with MODIFY. Channel Layout Editor - Wizard The wizard makes it possible to insert a matrix/array or circle of objects of any type. 1. Open the wizard by pressing or clicking WIZARD.
PAGE 556
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 2. Select matrix/array or circle. 3. Fill in numbers, type and behaviour. 4.Confirm.
PAGE 557
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 HINT: Use the Stretch H and V wheels to trim the insertion. Examples of circle and matrix Channel Layout Editor - Text It is possible to set a text to a line or box. 1. Select the object. 2. Press TEXT (Alt T from keyboard). 3. Enter a text and confirm with MODIFY. NOTE Use size to resize a text for an object.
PAGE 558
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 559
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Layouts - Create Start by inserting and naming a new Layout. Function Key Feedback 1. Open the Channel Layout List. Browser >Setup >Channel Layout Opens the Channel Layout list. 2. Create a new layout [#] [INSERT] A new layout is inserted. A popup will ask if you want to pre-fill with patch or channel selection. 3. Name Layout [MODIFY] Move to TEXT cell and press MODIFY. Give a name. Now open the Channel Layout Editor Function Key Feedback 4.
PAGE 560
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Layouts - Channels Channels can have color, symbol, rotation and color. You can use Align, Copy, Paste and Wizard to edit and insert channels. See Channel Layouts - Editor. Insert single channels 1. Select channel object with the arrow in the lower corner of the object box. 2. Enter a starting number 3. Click to insert the first 4. Continue clicking to insert consecutive objects. Select the arrow tool to edit an existing object. Insert a channel selection 1.
PAGE 561
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Layouts - Channel Features There are various features for a channel in a Layout. Color, size, rotation etc. All of these features are described in the chapter Channel Layouts - Editor. These are examples of most functions in use.
PAGE 562
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Layouts - Lines Lines can be drawn in any direction. 1. Select line object with the arrow in the lower corner of the object box. 2. Click and drag to draw a line. 3. Click and drag again to create a new line. Select the arrow tool to edit an existing line. NOTE If you click on a line in an active layout, you will select all channels that are on top of it. If you double click, all other channels will be de- selected first. Objects will be executed.
PAGE 563
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Layouts - Boxes and Circles Boxes and circles can be filled or frames and have a text label. 1. Select box or circle object with the arrow in the lower corner of the object box. 2. Click and drag to draw a box or circle. 3. Click and drag again to create a new box or circle. Select the arrow tool to edit an existing box or circle. NOTE If you click on a box or circle in an active layout, you will select all channels inside.
PAGE 564
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Layouts - Content The following types of Play content, besides channels, can be added to a channel layout. To activate a content object in a Layout - click on it. Color and Size do not apply to these objects. All other Layout functions are available.
PAGE 565
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Partitions A channel partition is a definition of a limited set of channels and attributes. When activated, only these channels can be accessed.
PAGE 566
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Partitions - Introduction A partition is a definition of a set of channels/devices. Every Partition has a permission mask which defines if the Partition is applied to • • • • IFCB Intensity Intensity/Color Intensity/Focus/Beam/Other Partitions can only be activated by users that have permission to activate them. Once a Partition is active, it limits the access to these channels.
PAGE 567
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Partitions - List Open the Partition List from the Browser (Browser >Channels >Settings and Tools >Channel Partitions). You can view, edit and create new Partitions in this list. Partitions List - Columns Function Key Partition Feedback The ID of each Partition. Cannot be changed. Text [MODIFY] Press MODIFY to activate and end text input. This text is shown in the top bar of the channel views. Active [MODIFY] Toggles the Partition on/off.
PAGE 568
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 * If a User is logged in that does not have permission to activate a Partition, the Active cell will show "---". See User Login. NOTE The default Partition "All" is always defined to allow access to the full system.
PAGE 569
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Partitions - Create Partitions are created in the Channel Partition List. 1. Open the Channel Partition List (Browser >Channels >Settings and Tools >Channel Partitions) 2. 3. 4. Press INSERT Select channels (they will show up in the Channel View part). Press RECORD or UPDATE to store the channel selection.
PAGE 570
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 5. 6. Press MODIFY in the TEXT cell to give a name to this Partition Press MODIFY in the APPLY TO cell to choose permission level. Partitions - Add Partition Wizard There is a Wizard to assist you in creating Partitions using Play information that already has been generated. 1. 2. Open the Partition List (BROWSER >Setup >Partition List) Press WIZARD. These are the different options.
PAGE 571
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Partitions - Activate Partitions are activated from the Partition List. 1. 2. Open the Partition List (Browser>Channels>Settings and Tools>Channel Partition) Press MODIFY in the ACTIVE cell to toggle Yes/No. The active Partition is indicated in the yellow info banner at the top of all Channel Views. NOTE If no Partition is active, all channels are available, and shown in the Live View. In Live Attributes, only channels and attributes that can be controlled are shown.
PAGE 572
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Devices A channel with any attributes (parameters) in addition to intensity is called a Device. This includes scrollers, moving lights and media servers.
PAGE 573
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Devices - Introduction A Device has to be Patched before you can start controlling it. See Patch Device(s). Devices - Controls • • • • • • • • • • Select a channel to get control of a Device. The Main Display of the console has wheels and keys for controlling Moving Device parameters. Position pan/tilt with the trackball or wheels. There is a special Device mode for testing. Load and change templates at any time There is a soft key page for lamp strike.
PAGE 574
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Devices - Templates • • • Edit a template at any time Create your own templates Change a template (device) for another Devices - Multicell Devices (7.1) A device that has more than one set of intensities or color sources. The challenge in controlling this type of devices is that there may be several intensity controls, and multiple cells of color mixing light sources that can be controlled both individually and as a group.
PAGE 575
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Selection logic for channel selection from numerical keypad with default Cobalt syntax (RPN mode). See also Select Channels >> Select Function Key Explanation Select complete device [1] [CHANNEL] Selects the base channel and all decimal channels Select only base channel [1] [.] [0] [CHANNEL] Selects only the base channel. [1] [.] [1] [CHANNEL] Selects only the decimal channel.
PAGE 576
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 This is what the template for a multicell device lsuch as the Martin EvenLED looks like In the Channel Views there is a tool for toggling how decimal channels are shown Devices - Compound Devices (7.1) A compund device is a device made up of several separate devices, for example a moving light yoke with a fixture and a separate color changer.
PAGE 577
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 In the case of a scroller, this is handled automatically by assigning the scroller to the dimmer controlling the intensity of the fixture. In any other case, use a compund device template. All parameters of all parts of a compound device will be shown as attributes when this device is selected. This is what the template for a compound device can look like Devices - Media Servers A media server is no different from any other device - patch the template and use it.
PAGE 578
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • A media that is playing is indicated with a play symbol (triangle) in the media preview in the Channel Layout. • ArKaos: Media extensions (like .jpg) are stripped off the range names. • When using Library and File parameters on Direct Selects, File content is now updated when you change the Library.
PAGE 579
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Devices - Functions These are the general device functions.
PAGE 580
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Control The Main Display section of the console is optimized for working with functions in moving devices.
PAGE 581
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Control - Introduction When you select the channel(s) of a moving device(s) (see Channels - Command Syntax) - all controls are automatically mapped to this section (and to the Device Controls Dock). 1. Parameter group 2. Parameter name 3. Parameter wheel 4.
PAGE 582
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Controls - Functions Number Function Explanation 1 Parameter Groups* Parameters are divided into three categories, Focus, Color and Beam. Select category by pressing one of these keys. All available Device Parameters within this category are mapped to the Wheels and shown in the display above them (2). If there are more than four parameters, press the category key again for the next set. 2 Parameter name Each wheel has a section of the display dedicated to it.
PAGE 583
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Control - Lamp Control The LAMP CONTROL key in the programming section activates the Lamp Control Soft Key Page with functions which are defined in the template of each device.
PAGE 584
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Control Soft Key Page - Functions Action Soft Key Feedback Enable [ENABLE] This key has to be pressed together with Lamp On/Off/Reset to activate them (as a safety measure).
PAGE 585
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Control - Home Positioning The HOME ATTRIB key in the programming section allows you to set devices or parts of devices to their home position. Home positioning of a device means setting all parameters (or part of them) to the default values defined in the template of this device. Normally this means setting pan and tilt to 50%, color to white and all other parameters to neutral.
PAGE 586
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Control - U1-U2-U3 The parameter group keys U1-U3 in the programming section can be set up with any mix of device parameters. Each of them have three sub-pages. This makes a total of nine user definable parameter pages. This editor is opened by holding MODIFY and pressing U1-U3 or a Wheel key when a bank (U1-U3) is selected. NOTE Each User Bank (U1-U3) has three parameter pages (1-3). They are shown in the same editor.
PAGE 587
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 U1-U3 - Setting Up Parameters Column Function Feedback Page No function This is the number of the Page (1-3) under this User Bank (U1-U3) Wheel No function This is the number of the Wheel, and cannot be changed. Parameter [MODIFY] Opens a dropdown with all parameters. Select one and press MODIFY to confirm* *The letter (FCB) after a parameter indicates it's parameter group. NOTE Parameters in U1-U3 are still stored in the original palette types (Focus, Color, Beam).
PAGE 588
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Control - Align The Align key in the programming section copies parameters from one Device to several others. 1. 2. 3.
PAGE 589
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Control - Fan The FAN key in the programming section is used to distribute values of a parameter evenly around a centre point. There are four shapes of fan: Linear S = S shaped V = V shaped U = U shaped Function Key Feedback 1. Select channels Channel Select functions Selected channels are highlighted in the Channel View 2. Select base channel* [NEXT] The focused channel is highlighted in red 3.
PAGE 590
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Fan Settings Hold SETUP and press FAN to open the Fan Settings Select with arrow keys, and press MODIFY to confirm.
PAGE 591
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Control - Fetch/Copy The FAN key in the programming section is used to copy parameter values for devices from any Preset. Fetching from Presets in the Main Sequence will copy the STATE of those devices including any tracked values from presets earlier in the Sequence. 1. 2. First select the devices you wish to copy values to.
PAGE 592
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Control - Highlight Mode The HIGHLIGHT key in the programming section is used to set Devices to a temporary Highlight mode. It will set all intensity channels to the ID level in Cobalt Settings (default 100%) and all device channels to the values defined in their templates, with the highlighted device to white. Action Key Feedback Activate Highlight [HIGHLIGHT] All channels in the current selection are highlighted. The LED in the key is lit.
PAGE 593
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Control - Flip If a moving head reaches its end position for Pan - it is possible to press FLIP to invert the pan and tilt values so that the end position is "passed". Observe that the result of a flip depends on the pan range of a device, and will not always be the same position as before the flip. (Soft Key Pages are commands in the lower right corner of screen 2) Select the device(s) you wish to flip, and press FLIP. To undo press FLIP again.
PAGE 594
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Control - Device Control Dock Area As soon as a device is selected, all parameters are assigned to the Device Control dock area.
PAGE 595
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Control - Select Changed The SET CHANGED soft key allows you to select all devices that have manually changed attributes other than intensity, since the current preset was loaded to the A field.
PAGE 596
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Control - Device Mode Press DEVICE to activate Device Mode. The top potentiometers in the masters section will provide direct access to a definable number of device parameters.
PAGE 597
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Displays The parameters are definable in the Device Mode settings. In Cobalt 10: Press RANGE to the other upper/lower bank. Device Mode Settings You can define the parameters in Device Mode in two ways. • • Assigning them directly by holding a parameter wheel key and pressing a master key. See Masters - Attribute parameters In the Device Mode Parameters setup. Hold SETUP and press DEVICE to open the Device Mode settings.
PAGE 598
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 599
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Views Attributes for devices can be shown in any channel view.
PAGE 600
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Views - Introduction A device view with attributes can be opened in any channel view by pressing ATTRIB. They are all edited in the same way. In the Live tab attribute view you can set times. See Devices Times.
PAGE 601
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Views - Live The Device view is viewed in the Live tab by pressing ATTRIB.
PAGE 602
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 You can open cells for setting parameter times and delays directly by holding FORMAT and pressing the DOWN ARROW.
PAGE 603
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Views - Filtering Hold the FORMAT key and press FOCUS, COLOR or BEAM to select which parameter group to hide/show in a Moving Device View.
PAGE 604
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Views - Editing When you open a device view you can use all palette and wheel controls to edit attributes. NOTE All attribute views need to be unlocked for screen editing by holding SETUP & TAB and activating in the popup. If you unlock the view for screen editing you can enter a value or a Palette reference, depending on the Attribute Editor Default Settings. The default setting is Palette. See Attribute Settings. This is how you can enter values for the selected cell(s).
PAGE 605
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Views - Presets You can view and edit all device parameters for a Preset in the Preset Attribute Editor (# PRESET & ATTRIB). NOTE Select format by pressing FORMAT. Hold FORMAT and press Down Arrow to open up Time and Delay rows.
PAGE 606
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Preset Attribute Editor - Columns These are the different Device parameters that are displayed for each with their current values. For editing see Device Views - Editing. Function group Parameters Explanation Channel & Level No input The number of the device is highlighted when selected, and red when focused with NEXT/LAST. The level is indicated to the right.
PAGE 607
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Preset Attribute Editor - Times You can toggle the format of the Preset Attribute Editor to show Times and Delays by holding FORMAT and pressing arrow DOWN or arrow UP.
PAGE 608
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Views - Data Press DATA to toggle attributes to show in absolute values or referenced values (palettes). Absolute values are preceded by a # character to show that they are absolute values in stead of palettes. Show Palette Show Values Live Effects/Preset Attribute Editors show Absolute/Palette in the header depending on the current setting. In Congo hardware this is a soft key in the Channels Soft Key Page.
PAGE 609
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Recording Attributes are stored in Presets just like intensities. There are different recording modes.
PAGE 610
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Recording - Introduction There are four recording modes for recording device parameters: • • • • Active (default) Changed All Popup If only changed Device parameters are recorded it is important to record all parameters (a block cue) in the beginning of each Sequence. There is a check box for this in the Advanced Tab of the Recording Popup.
PAGE 611
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Recording - Modes There are four different Recording modes for recording Device attributes. They are set in the RECORD SETTINGS (Hold SETUP and press RECORD). You will get this popup These are the modes Function Description Changed All changed attributes are recorded automatically* Popup A popup is provided to confirm recording all changed attributes All All attributes are recorded Active (default) All attributes of devices with an intensity over zero are recorded.
PAGE 612
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 If you are recording "Changed" attributes you may wish to force this flag manually. This is done with the soft key SET CHNGED in the Devices soft key of monitor 2.
PAGE 613
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Step 2. SETCHNGED All commands are executed to the currently selected Devices. Function Key Feedback Set all parameters to changed [Set_Chnged] & [PALETTE] All parameters are flagged as changed (purple background). Set Focus parameters to changed [Set_Chnged] & [FOCUS] Focus parameters are flagged as changed (purple background). Set Color parameters to changed [Set_Chnged] & [COLOR] Color parameters are flagged as changed (purple background).
PAGE 614
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 The changed device indication is cleared when you fade or step in the Sequence. See Channel Information - Detailed For more information see Presets - Record Active Mode & Mark Active Mode (default) means that all devices with an intensity over 0% will be recorded with all parameters. To be able to record parameters when an intensity is at 0% there is a special intensity state called "Mark" which is indicated with an "M" where the level is normally shown.
PAGE 615
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Use the check box to activate track-editing through a series of sequence steps of the main sequence (stopping at Blocks) and select forward, backward or both in the direction dropdown.
PAGE 616
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Recording - All Attributes In Changed mode, only changed (purple) parametersare recorded for devices. The opposite of this is to record all attributes. When you record devices directly to a Master Playback all attributes are always recorded. In the sequence it is an option in the advanced Recording Popup. See The Recording Popup. Check the box "Record all attributes" to record all attributes.
PAGE 617
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Recording - Delete You can delete device data from a Preset in the Preset editor, in the Organizer or in the Preset Attribute editor. See Device Views - Editing. 1. Open the Preset List for the Preset. • • Enter the number of the Preset, hold MODIFY and press PRESET OR open the List from the Browser (Browser >Main Show Data >Presets) 2. Select the Attributes column. 3. Select the channels you wish to delete.
PAGE 618
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 5. Press MODIFY to confirm.
PAGE 619
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Recording - Cue Only When this option in the Advanced tab of the Record dialog is activated all the attribute values that were active in the previous sequence step (regardless of where they were coming from) will be copied into the Preset in the sequence step following the newly inserted preset. This is useful when you want to record a new state within a series of tracked values. Cue Only is an option in the advanced Recording Popup. See The Recording Popup.
PAGE 620
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Palettes Moving Device values can be stored in Palettes, that are used to recall these values. Palettes can be stored in Presets, as references to the stored values. Palettes are organized in parameter groups (Focus, Color, Beam, All).
PAGE 621
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Palettes - Introduction A Palette is a memory for all or some parameters of a Moving Device. A Palette is used to load these parameters quickly, and stored as a reference in Presets for playback. Direct selects are important for accessing Palettes. See Direct Selects. There are four kinds of Palettes Type Key Parameters Focus Palettes [FOCUS] Position parameters like pan, tilt... Color Palettes [COLOR] Color parameters like cyan, magenta, yellow, color wheel...
PAGE 622
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Palettes - Record To record a device palette hold RECORD and press the PALETTE, FOCUS, COLOR or BEAM key (see below). • • • Palettes are stored for the currently selected channel(s). To re-record a Palette, store it with the same number again. In the recording popup for Palettes there is a Text field to label each Palette. This is displayed every time the Palette is used. NOTE When you record a Palette, it is also activated and will be recorded into the next Preset.
PAGE 623
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record A Focus Palette 1. Select channel(s) 2. Initiate recording of next free Palette or Palette # Function Key Feedback Record [RECORD] & [FOCUS] Records the next free Focus palette. You will get a popup* Record as... [#] [RECORD] & [FOCUS] Records as palette #. You will get a popup* Record Direct [RECORD] & [direct_select] Records to a direct select in palette mode. You will get a popup* *Popup 3. Enter a text (optional) 4. Select Recording mode.
PAGE 624
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record A Color Palette 1. Select channel(s) 2. Initiate recording of next free Palette or Palette # Function Key Feedback Record [RECORD] & [COLOR] Records the next free Color palette. You will get a popup* Record as... [#] [RECORD] & [COLOR] Records as palette #. You will get a popup* Record Direct [RECORD] & [direct_select] Records to a direct select in palette mode. You will get a popup* *Popup 3. Enter a text (optional) 4. Select Recording mode.
PAGE 625
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record A Beam Palette 1. Select channel(s) 2. Initiate recording of next free Palette or Palette # Function Key Feedback Record [RECORD] & [BEAM] Records the next free Beam palette. You will get a popup* Record as... [#] [RECORD] & [BEAM] Records as palette #. You will get a popup* Record Direct [RECORD] & [direct_select] Records to a direct select in palette mode. You will get a popup* *Popup 3. Enter a text (optional) 4. Select Recording mode.
PAGE 626
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record An All Palette 1. Select channel(s) 2. Initiate recording of next free Palette or Palette # Function Key Feedback Record [RECORD] & [PALETTE] Records the next free All palette.You will get a popup* Record as... [#] [RECORD] & [PALETTE] Records as all palette #. You will get a popup* Record Direct [RECORD] & [direct_select] Records to a direct select in palette mode.You will get a popup* *Popup 3. Enter a text (optional) 4. Select Recording mode.
PAGE 627
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE The MASK function can be used to filter out unwanted parameters when recording a Palette. See Device Control - Mask.
PAGE 628
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Palettes - Update The fastest way to update all changed palettes when working in the sequence loaded to the main playback is to use the UPDATE PALETTE function in the soft keys on screen 1. 1. Press <--- to reach the top menu. 2. Press DEVICE to select the Device Soft Key page. 3. Press UPDATE PALETT to update all changed Palettes for the selected channel(s).
PAGE 629
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 2. You will get a popup confirming which ones are involved. Device Palettes - UPDATE direct key If a Palette is loaded to a Direct Select section, or to a Master Playback - it is possible to update it by selecting the involved channels, holding UPDATE and pressing the corresponding Direct Select or Master key. NOTE This shortcut is not available when an Editor is focused that uses UPDATE for something else. For example the Preset List.
PAGE 630
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Re-record A Palette - Merge Or Replace When you re-record a preset or palette where attribute information already exists, you will get a choice of merging or replacing the existing attributes.
PAGE 631
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Palettes - Edit Open the Device Palette Attribute Editor from the Browser >Devices >Focus Palette... (Color, Beam, All). Device Palettes are edited and filtered in the same way as the Live Attributes and Preset Attribute views. See Device Views - Editing and Device Views - Filtering.
PAGE 632
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Palettes - Lists Hold MODIFY and press FOCUS, COLOR, BEAM or PALETTE to open a Palette list where you can edit palettes. The Palette Lists are also opened from the Browser (Browser >Devices >Palettes >Focus Palettes). NOTE Palettes that have been recorded "per type of device" are shown first in these lists. Most often these are Color Palettes. See Each Device or Each Device Type Palette List - Columns & Functions Function Key Feedback Palette The ID of each Palette.
PAGE 633
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Palettes - Activate By Number Activate a Palette for the selected channel(s) by number. Function Key Feedback Focus Palette [#] [FOCUS] Values are set from Palette #. Color Palette [#] [COLOR] Values are set from Palette #. Beam Palette [#] [BEAM] Values are set from Palette #. All Palette [#] [PALETTE] Values are set from Palette #. NOTE Only selected channel(s) that are referenced in Palette # will be affected.
PAGE 634
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Palettes - Direct Mode When a Palette key (FOCUS, COLOR, BEAM, PALETTE) is held the first 40 Palettes can be activated from the Direct Select keys. Function Key Feedback 1. Activate Direct Mode Hold a Palette key Direct Select display shows the first 40 2. Select Palette Direct Select key When the key is pressed that Palette is activated.
PAGE 635
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Palettes - In Masters Enter the number of a palette, hold the pallete type key (FOCUS, COLOR, BEAM, PALETTE) and press a Master key to load to that master. The Device Palettes can now be played back from Master Playbacks by pressing the master key. See Master Playbacks - Palettes.
PAGE 636
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Palettes - Select Active Channels All channels currently referencing a Palette can be selected using the Direct Select keys for Palettes (FOCUS, COLOR, BEAM, PALETTE), in combination with CHANNEL and ALL. Palettes are selected from the Direct Selects for this function. See Direct Selects. Function Key Feedback Select channels [CHANNEL] & [Direct_Select#] All channels stored in Palette # are selected in the active Channel View.
PAGE 637
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Palettes - Select Stored Channels You can Select all channels that are stored in a Palette as Each Device. NOTE This is not possible for palettes stored as "Each Device Type", since no specific channels are stored with them. Function Key Feedback Focus channels [#] [CHANNEL] & [FOCUS] All channels stored in Palette # are selected in the active Channel View. Color channels [#] [CHANNEL] & [COLOR] All channels stored in Palette # are selected in the active Channel View.
PAGE 638
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Palettes - Display List This is a list that shows all Palettes in the ML display of the Console mimic dock. For more information see Display Lists. Function Key Feedback Focus Palette List [Display_List] & [FOCUS] The Focus Palette list is opened in the Main Display. Color Palette List [Display_List] & [COLOR] The Color Palette list is opened in the Main Display. Beam Palette List [Display_List] & [BEAM] The Beam Palette list is opened in the Main Display.
PAGE 639
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Palettes - Focusing Mode Focusing mode is designed for quickly focusing and updating palettes. It works together with the List section of the LCD Display. It is activated from the FOCUS MODE soft-key in the DEVICE Soft page. Action Key Feedback 1. Select the DEVICE soft page [DEVICE] (Softkey) The Device soft functions are selected in the Main Display of the console. 2. Activate Focus Mode [FOCUS_MODE] (Softkey) "Focusing mode" is shown on the Main Display.
PAGE 640
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Palettes - Renumber You can renumber a Palette of any type (FCBP) in the Organizer. 1. Open the Organizer for the type of palette you wish to renumber by holding LOAD and pressing the palette key (FOCUS, COLOR, BEAM, PALETTE).
PAGE 641
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 2.
PAGE 642
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Times Times for Moving Devices can be set in seconds or as a percentage of the Sequence Step In-times.
PAGE 643
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Times - Introduction A Moving Device can have Times and Delays in the following ways. • • • • No time - follows the Sequence Step In-time. Parameter group times - an attribute time for FOCUS, COLOR or BEAM parameters. FCB times - Same as above, but there is a shortcut for setting all three Device parameter times - A time for each attribute of a Moving Device.
PAGE 644
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 In the example above, the FCB Times are 100% of the In time (5 seconds). If the FCB Times are set to 50% of the IN-time they will be 2.5 seconds at an in time of 5 seconds. If the In-time is changed to 10 seconds, the FCB-times will be 50% of 10 (= 5 seconds). NOTE In Congo plays files earlier than Version 4.2, the FCB Delay time was set to 100% due to the fact that Delay Times were inherited from the Delay In time. These plays (pre-4.
PAGE 645
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Default Attribute Time The Default Attribute Time (3 seconds) is used mainly to keep noise and unnecessary mechanical friction down when a Moving Device is positioned in the following situations: • • • • • • When attributes are executed from Independents When copying Blind attributes to Live When using Stop table for an old dynamic When you press Home Attributes When jumping in the sequence Using REFRESH in the Main Playback To change this time see Attribute Settings.
PAGE 646
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Times - Individual or FCB Device times can be set to individual parameter of selected devices, or to a parameter group like Focus, Color or Beam for all devices in the preset. FCB times are defaulted to run in 100% of the main In and Delay times for a step. You can change this percentage or set an absolute time in seconds. An individual parameter time always wins over a general FCB time. Times are shown in the playback view.
PAGE 647
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Setting times with key shortcuts You can set times with a key shortcut by entering the time, holding TIME and pressing a destination key (see table). You will get a popup asking if you want to set the times on a general FCB -level for all devices, or as individual Parameter Times for the selected devices.
PAGE 648
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 649
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 You can edit FCB times in the Preset List. NOTE There is a shortcut for setting both F, C and B-Times to the same value. Enter the time and hold TIME or DELAY and press ATTRIBUTE. In the Times soft key page there are keys for setting FCB time and delay directly. See Times Soft Key Page.
PAGE 650
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Times - Attribute Editor Times Times can be set and edited in the Live Attributes and Preset Attribute Editors. Please note that times are set to A working in this editor, regardless of all other settings. • • Press ATTRIB to open the Live Attribute Editor. Enter a Preset number, hold PRESET and press ATTRIB to open the Preset Attribute Editor. Hold FORMAT and press the down arrow to open Time and Delay rows. Hold FORMAT and press TIME or DELAY to do the same thing.
PAGE 651
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Attribute Times These functions will work in the Live Attribute Editor and the Preset Attribute Editor. Action Key Feedback 1. Open the Time row [FORMAT] & [Down_arrow] or [FORMAT] & [TIME] The Time row is opened under each cell 2. Select Attribute time cell(s) Arrow keys The cell(s) is highlighted 3. Set time # [#] [MODIFY] The time # is set to the selected cell(s) 4. Update Preset [UPDATE] Only needed in Live Attributes Editor.
PAGE 652
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Attribute Delay Times These functions will work in the Live Attribute Editor and the Preset Attribute Editor. Action Key Feedback 1. Open the Delay row [FORMAT] & [Down_arrow] [Down_arrow] or [FORMAT] & [DELAY] The Delay row is opened under each cell 2. Select Attribute delay cell(s) Arrow keys The cell(s) is highlighted 3. Set delay time # [#] [MODIFY] The delay time # is set to the selected cell(s) 4. Update Preset [UPDATE] Only needed in Live Attributes Editor.
PAGE 653
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Times - Fan Times In the Live and Preset Attribute Views there is a wizard for fanning parameter times. This Wizard will only open when a Time or Delay cell is selected. The selected cells are fanned between the devices. 1. Open an Attribute view. See Device Views - Live and Device Views - Presets. 2. Open the Time and Delay rows by holding FORMAT and pressing the Down Arrow. See Device Times - Attribute Time Editor. 3.
PAGE 654
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Play Back When moving Devices are played back from the Main Playback and the Master Playbacks there are different modes for when and how attributes are trigged.
PAGE 655
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Play back - Introduction Attributes will be trigged during playback in the following situations • • • • • A Preset is faded in a Sequence or Chase A Preset is faded in on a Master Playback fader A Preset is faded out on a Master Playback fader A Master is flashed A Dynamic effect is started In a Sequence Step attributes can be set to move with Auto Mark (5.0), OnGo (live) or InB (move while black, preposition).
PAGE 656
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Play back - Attributes Follow Faders Attributes will follow the manual movement of masters depending on the Master Settings. These are some general rules. See Master Settings. The always follow the B fader of the Main Playback. • • They start moving at 1%. Snap parameters also trig at 1%. Master Playbacks behave different from the crossfaders of the Main Playback.
PAGE 657
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Device Play back - Attrib Move Attributes can be executed in three ways • • • AutoMark On Go In B Depending on this setting Attributes will be executed when a step is faded in live (On Go) or when a Step is loaded to be faded in (In B). See System Settings - Attribute. You can choose a setting as default depending on the style of your show - and then change individually for any step or device. See Sequence List. NOTE GoInB attributes follow the times recorded in the preset.
PAGE 658
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Live Attributes In addition to the Attribute format of the Live tab you can view all moving device parameters in the Live Attribute Editor. This tab can only be opened from the Browser (Browser >Devices >Live Attributes). The functions are the same as in any channel view with attributes. NOTE All attribute views need to be unlocked for screen editing by holding SETUP & TAB and activating in the popup. PARK works against selected cells when an Attribute View is open.
PAGE 659
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE Select format by pressing FORMAT. Hold FORMAT and press Down Arrow to open up Time and Delay rows. See Device Times - Attribute Time Editor Live Attributes - Columns These are the different Moving Device parameters that are displayed for each with their current values. For editing see Device Views - Editing Function group Parameters Explanation Channel & Level No input The number of the device is highlighted when selected, and red when focused with NEXT/LAST.
PAGE 660
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Gel Picker There is a Gel Picker that uses the data for each moving device with CMY/RGB mix to generate the values for gels of each type. It is opened from the Browser >Devices >Gel Picker. Tap or use arrow keys and MODIFY to select a color. If you know the exact gel brand and number you can select a gel from the Direct Selects as well.
PAGE 661
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 All Palettes This node opens the list of All Palettes. Press MODIFY in the Attribute cell to open the corresponding Palette editor. See Device Palettes.
PAGE 662
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Focus Palettes This node opens the list of Focus Palettes. Press MODIFY in the Attribute cell to open the corresponding Palette editor. See Device Palettes.
PAGE 663
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Color Palettes This node opens the list of Color Palettes. Press MODIFY in the Attribute cell to open the corresponding Palette editor. See Device Palettes.
PAGE 664
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Beam Palettes This node opens the list of Beam Palettes. Press MODIFY in the Attribute cell to open the corresponding Palette editor. See Device Palettes.
PAGE 665
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Mask You can mask whole groups of parameters (FCB) or single parameters in a group with the MASK key. • • • • • • When mask is active it is indicated in the LED of the MASK key, and at the top of the screens. The mask is used when recording Presets, Palettes and Dynamics. Masked parameters are displayed in Live tab Attributes view and in the ML LCD on the facepanel with "--". When you record a Preset or Palette, masked parameters are NOT recorded.
PAGE 666
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masking indication When Mask is enabled, a summary of active masks is shown in the ML display. Each parameter category is indicated with a dash, lowercase or uppercase letter. "-" (Dash) means the category is unmasked - all parameters are available for control and recording. "fcb" (Lowercase lettering) means the category is partially masked - some parameters have been masked and are unavailable for control or recording.
PAGE 667
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 User Masks - Functions You can save and label up to 999 different combinations of masked parameters. These Masks can then be applied to masters as playback masks, or to the Global Mask for use when recording Palettes or Presets. They are stored in the Mask List (Browser > Devices >Masks). To record a user Mask: 1. 2.
PAGE 668
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 >Settings & Tools These are the settings and tools for Devices.
PAGE 669
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Scroller Rolls Scroller Rolls are defined in the Scroller Roll Editor. It is opened from the Browser (Browser >Devices >Settings & Tools >Scroller Rolls) Scroller Rolls Editor - Columns Function Value Feedback Scroller Roll 1-999 The ID of each Template.
PAGE 670
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Create a Scroller Roll 1. Open the Scroller Rolls List from the Browser (Browser >Devices >Settings and Tools >Scroller Rolls). 2.Press INSERT to create a new Roll (a number of standard Rolls are created by default when you open a new Play). 3. Set Fan=Intensity, Default Time and TEXT for this roll. 4. Press MODIFY in the Scroller Roll cell to open the Scroller Roll Editor. A Wizard is opened where you can define the number of frames and the default Fan value (can be edited later).
PAGE 671
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 You can define the following functions Function Value Feedback Position 1-999 The ID of each Position. Cannot be changed. Text Press MODIFY to activate and end text input. Fan % 0-100% It is possible to set a Fan value for each color (to keep noise down). AutoMove 0-10 The scroller will move slowly forth and back 0-10 bits when the corresponding color is selected. It will not take individual calibration into account.
PAGE 672
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 4. Select a roll with arrow keys. 5. Press MODIFY to confirm. The currently selected color will be shown in the black box under the level in the Channel Views. Calibrate Individual Scroller Rolls Each scroller roll can be calibrated individually. This is done in the Scroller Calibration Editor that is opened from the Device Settings. 1. Open the Device Settings (Browser >Patching >Device Settings). 2. Use arrow keys to select the Calibration Editor cell to the far right. 3.
PAGE 673
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Scroller Fan override In the Attribute setup (SETUP & ATTRIBUTE) it is possible to specify an Override value for all Scroller Fans. If you set a value > 0%, this value will be used instead of the Fan values programmed in the Scroller Roll. This is useful for making a temporary and absolute override of all fans, for example during long rehearsals when heat is higher than during a performance.
PAGE 674
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effects In Cobalt v6 there are four different kinds of effects: • • • • Intensity Chase (step based) Dynamic (relative waveforms) Content (Absolute) Image (mapped) There are two slightly different types of effects, which are Sequences in Chase mode, and Direct Dynamics.
PAGE 675
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effects - Introduction The effects in Cobalt are powerful devices that allow you to create and play with effects in a very intuitive and fast way, regardless the size or nature of your rig. All effects are defined in, and can be tested in the demo shows, which is a good way to become aquainted with them. See Try out the effects in a Demo Play >> There are four types of effects Chase Content Dynamic Image Stepped intensity effects with live control of tap tempo.
PAGE 676
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE Effects are controlled, recorded and edited like any moving device with an intensity. The only difference is that you select them with # EFFECT. LIMITATIONS Current limitations are: • • • Number of effect channels: 100 Number of outputs used by effects: 2 x 512 Number of groups that can be used in effects: 256 Try out the effects in a Demo Play (7.1) One way of understanding the simple, and powerful features of the effects is to try them out in one of the demo plays. 1. 2.
PAGE 677
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 2. 3. In the Device dock, you have two parameters, Chase: (symmetrical), Rate (100%). Tap on the rate to change the tempo. Hold C and press LIVE LIIVE to clear all output. Content Effect This is a content effect, it uses steps defined in a Series. A Series can contain palettes, presets and parameters. Note that the Groups used are those already recorded, and the number of the Group is used by the effect. 1. 2. Enter 2, press EFFECT and move the level wheel to full.
PAGE 678
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effects - Functions These are the general effect functions.
PAGE 679
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effects - Views Effects can be viewed in three views • • • Effects dock area Selected channels - Live dock area Live Effects tab There are two ways to display an effect • • As a channel handle (in docks) As a device (in Live Effects) Channel handle The effect handle in the Effects and Selected Channels - Live dock have four levels of detail. Hold FORMAT and press up/down arrow to select them. Device In the Live Effects tab all attributes are displayed just like a moving device.
PAGE 680
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effects in Dock Areas Effects are shown at the end of all Channel Views, and in two dock areas: Effects and Selected Channels Live. See Dock Areas.
PAGE 681
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Selected channels - Live Using a mouse or trackball Click to select and use the mouse wheel, or hold the right key and move to set levels. Click to add more, double-click to deselect all but the last clicked.
PAGE 682
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effects - Command syntax Effects are selected and adjusted one by one or in groups in the same way as moving devices. Instead of using the CHANNEL key there is an EFFECT key. As soon as an effect is selected you can control the intensity with all level functions, and attributes with attribute controls and palettes. Select and activate effects An effect is activated as soon as the level of the Effect Playback is over zero.
PAGE 683
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 If your Cobalt is set to use At Mode for channel commands, effects are selected in the following ways. You can terminate a selection in At Mode pressing @Level or the decimal point.
PAGE 684
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Home functions for effects A very useful function for effects is Home. You can store a home position for all parameters. Action Key Feedback Record HOME [RECORD] & [HOME_ATTRIB] All current parameters of the selected effect(s) are recorded as a home position. HOME [HOME] & [EFFECT] All Effect Playbacks move to their Home position. By default, this will stop all Content, Dynamic and Image effects but does not stop Chases.
PAGE 685
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Function Softkey Feedback Channel Set List [Channel_Set] Opens the Channel Set List. See Channel Sets. Series List [Series] Opens the Series List. See Series List. Effect Overvi [Effect_Overvi] Opens the Effect Overview Tab. See Effect Overview. Chase [Chase] Opens the Chase Editor. See Chase Editor. Dynamics [Dynamics] Opens the Dynamics Soft key menu. See Dynamic Effects.
PAGE 686
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effects - Edit Effects are edited in the same way as moving devices. Attribute wheels A soon as an effect is selected the effect parameters are available on live attribute controls in parameter banks U1-U3. On Cobalt jr these can be found under the Device softkey or by using [C/Alt & [FOCUS], [COLOR], [BEAM] respectively. Palettes All effect attributes can be stored and played back from All Palettes. Hold RECORD and press PALETTE.
PAGE 687
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effects - Record Effects are stored in Presets in the same way devices are stored. 1. 2. 3. Select the effect Set a level Record If you have the default device setting "store if active" all effect parameters are stored automatically when the intensity is over zero%. The level of the effect playback shown and edited in the same way as channel intensities.
PAGE 688
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effects - Channel Distribution Wizard The Channel Distribution Wizard is used for Sets and Chase effects. I allows you to distribute a selection of channels into a number of parts (steps) in eight different ways. There are two ways to open this wizard • • Press MODIFY in the PARTS cell in a channel set list or chases list. Create a Chase Object. 1. 2. 3.
PAGE 689
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 These are the different distribution methods. Note that if the number of channels cannot be divided by the number of parts, the results will be different when using inverted distribution, since the odd channels will end up in the last part. Also, the order in which the channels are selected is the order in which they are distributed.
PAGE 690
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Live Effects Press EFFECT to open Live Effects. This is where you can view and edit the parameters of all running effect playbacks in the screens. In the consoles you can control the same parameters in the Main Display over the parameter wheels. Things to think about in this view • • • • • Use arrow keys to navigate. Press MODIFY to get a drop down choice for a cell. Hold SELECT and use arrow keys to select several cells for data entry.
PAGE 691
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effect Playbacks An effect playback is the control handle for an effect, similar to a channel controlling a moving device. All Effect Playbacks are listed and can be inserted/deleted from the Effect Playbacks list Browser >Effects >Effect Playbacks. Create an Effect Playback Effects can be created from the Effect Playbacks list, or as a key command. 1. Create an Effect Playback • • Press INSERT in the Effect Playback list Hold INSERT & EFFECT 2.
PAGE 692
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 3. Done. You can now control the effect. See Select & Activate Effects.
PAGE 693
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effect Overview The effect overview tab lists all types of data objects that can be involved in creating and editing effects. It's opened from the Browser >Effects >Effect Overview. • • • • • • Groups Series Channel Sets Playbacks Chases Dynamic templates Press MODIFY in any cell to open the corresponding editor.
PAGE 694
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Chase Effects This is a step based, defined intensity effect. A chase is what you use when you want lights to chase on/off in a specific pattern. Each step contains channels, step times and step levels. You can define a high level for all channels in a step, and a low level which will be the background level of these channels in all steps.
PAGE 695
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • • • Contains the channel list and the high/low intensity levels and timing values. It has a number of steps, with channels, up, dwell and down times. Intensities per step have a Max (high) and Min (low) value. Once a Chase object is programmed it will replay in the exact same way. Playback • • • The effect will run as soon as the effect playback intensity is over zero. The intensity level of the effect playback also masters the high level of the output of the effect.
PAGE 696
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 2. Select channels, parts, name and distribution. See Channel Distribution Wizard. 3. You can now start the chase, by selecting it and setting a level over zero. See Select & Activate Effects. It will use the default times and values. These can be edited in the Chase Editor and the Chase Step Editor. Copy a chase effect You can use the COPY function to duplicate a chase effect. 1. Open the chase editor and select the chase you wish to copy 2.
PAGE 697
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • From the console parameter wheels using U1-U3. In Cobalt jr these can be found under the Device softkey or by using [C/Alt & [FOCUS], [COLOR], [BEAM] respectively. From the Live Effects view. Live Effects looks like this: Press MODIFY to get a dropdown to change chase, or enter a number and press MODIFY. NOTE When you press MODIFY or enter a number it will be an absolute value or a Palette value - depending on the setting in Attribute Settings. See Play Settings - Attribute.
PAGE 698
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Chase Effect Parameters A Chase object is never adjusted live - it is defined in two editors • • The Chase Editor The Chase Step Editor CHASE EDITOR PARAMETERS Its possible to edit a symmetrical Chase object from the Editor, without opening the Chase Step editor. However, if you want to edit the steps, or the individual step timing, you need to open the Chase Step Editor. Direction Sets the direction in which the steps are played back.
PAGE 699
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE If the Step time is shorter than the sum of In+Dwell+Out you will get a "ripple" effect. High & Low Each Step has a High intensity and a Low intensity that is used by the Chase. Chase Editor The chase editor is a summary and editor of all chases. You can create (INSERT) and edit chases here. • • Press the soft key CHASE in the EFFECTS soft key menu Press MODIFY in the Browser node Browser >Effects >Chase.
PAGE 700
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Chase Editor - Functions The Chase can only be edited from the Chase Editor and the Chase Step Editor. This ensures that a Chase will always play back in the way it is defined. Column Action Feedback Chase No Input The number of this chase, cannot be edited. Text [MODIFY] Enter a label. Steps [MODIFY] Shows the number of steps, press MODIFY to open the Channel Distribution Wizard. Direction [MODIFY] Choose between forward, backward, bounce and random.
PAGE 701
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 *The Default times are applied until you define a different time in the Chase Steps Editor. **Loop Time = the amount of time it takes to pass through all the steps of the chase once. Edit the loop time and all step times will be adjusted to evenly fit within this time value.. ***RateMin and RateMax work together to set the playback rate of the chase. When these values are the same, the chase is adjusted evenly.
PAGE 702
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Chase Step Editor - Functions The Chase can only be edited from the Chase Editor and the Chase Step Editor. This ensures that a Chase will always play back in the way it is defined. Timing information on a step level overrides timing information on the Chase Editor top level. Column Action Step Feedback Shows the number of each steps. Step time [#] [MODIFY] Sets a Step time.
PAGE 703
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Content Effects Content effects are simply speaking simply a series of steps containing show content like palettes and presets or even raw parameter levels that you can apply to any existing group (or set) in your show. The simplest form of content effect is the intensity series (on/off) that is created automatically when you make a new play. By applying this to a group of channels you can create chase, ripple and pulsating intensity effects on the fly.
PAGE 704
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 General The content effect separates the channel source (group or channel set) from the actions within the effect (series). Actions are defined using steps that can contain palettes, presets or parameters. Content effects can switch channel lists and/or series of steps independently and can be run in three different modes to change how the channel lists and steps interact with each other.
PAGE 705
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Create a Content Effect Playback 1. Create a Content Effect Playback. This can be done in two ways. • • # INSERT & EFFECT and select Content . Press INSERT in the Effect Playbacks List, and select Content . Now that the effect playback is created you can apply it to any channel group, or you can create channel sets and select them. You have to have a Series defined, since it is the engine of the content effects. 2.
PAGE 706
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Step around with arrow keys, press MODIFY to get a dropdown, or enter a number and press MODIFY. NOTE When you press MODIFY or enter a number it will be an absolute value or a Palette value - depending on the setting in Attribute Settings. See Play Settings - Attribute. Content Effect Parameters Besides the necessary channel source (Group or Channel Set) and Series, a number of parameters are combined to define the result of a Content effect.
PAGE 707
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • The advantage with Groups is that you can reuse all Groups you have already recorded, and create distribution and number of parts on the fly with the GrpParts and GrpDistri parameters. Set/Group Select a Set or Group as the Channel Source. NOTE: There is a special option named Groups (Auto) which will set the number of parts to a selected group to the number of channels in this group - allowing for a single step chase effect.
PAGE 708
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • • In a Continuous mode content effect, parts are always executing a step. In a three color RedGreen-Blue effect, all channels would be in one of those three colors all the time the effect is running. In a Build mode content effect, all parts execute step 1 before they execute step 2.
PAGE 709
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 the timing of the effect to match your tapped in rate. Fade times will scale appropriately when you use tap. Entry The Entry mode decides how channels will enter into the effect. Step Time The tempo of the effect - this time determines when each step will be executed.. Attack Time The fade time of the associated step or individual piece of content..
PAGE 710
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Series List The engine of a content effects is a Series. Browser >Effects >Content Effect >Series. • • • • You can think of a series as a number of place holders for parameter and intensity data. Each place holder has timing data that applies when it is called upon. There is a special place holder called background, that is used when effects are played back in Break mode.
PAGE 711
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Series List - Functions Column Action Feedback Series No Input This item can not be changed. Text [MODIFY] Label for this Series. Steps No Input Shows the number of steps. Def. Mode [MODIFY] Opens A dropdown where you can choose default mode Continuous, Break or Build* Def. StepTime [#] [MODIFY] Sets a top level Step Time for all Serie Steps** Def. AttackTime [#] [MODIFY] Sets a top level Attack Time for all Serie Steps** Def.
PAGE 712
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Series Step Editor The Series Step Editor is opened by pressing MODIFY in the Series or Steps cell of the Series List (above). NOTE When Palettes/Presets are used as content, the values will reference only to the numbers of these Palettes/Presets (not the names) - this is so that you can reuse the same series in other plays easily. If you are doing a lot of series creation, the Groups/Palettes Overview tab is a good way to know what you have already recorded..
PAGE 713
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Series Step Editor - Functions Column Action Feedback Step No Input This item can not be changed. Text [MODIFY] Enter a Step Text. Step Time [#] [MODIFY] This is the Step Time* Intensity [#] [MODIFY] Set an intensity level 0-100 or nothing. A hard 0 is indicated with "M". Attack [#] [MODIFY] Sets an Attack time for Intensity in this Step* 1.
PAGE 714
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Content Effect Modes A Content Effect can play back its Series in three different modes: • • • Break Continuous Build In the Series Editor you can define a default mode that is set every time the Series is activated. It's possible to change this mode on the fly when you edit the Effect Playback parameters. See Series List. What mode do I use? The modes allow you to get completely different results, using the same Series.
PAGE 715
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 A fly out can be done with a Dynamic Effect, but you have no control over the specific start and end points for each device. Here this is easy to change at any time by re-recording either of the two focus palettes used.. "An RGB chase" This can be done with a Content Effect in Continuous mode with three steps, (color palettes "red", "green", "blue"). In this example Color Palettes are used, although we could have used absolute values for CMY just as well.
PAGE 716
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 It is the combination of the parts distribution and the step timing that creates the overlapping ripple behavior. If the Attack+Sustain+Decay time is greater than the step time, you get ripple (overlapping) behavior. The number of Parts in the Channel Source will define how "wide" the ripple is.
PAGE 717
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 See Series List. In the Series Step editor, the times are • • • • Step Time Attack Time (separate for Intensity and each content 1-3 in each step) Sustain Time (Break mode only) per step Release Time (Break mode only) per step See Series Step Editor.
PAGE 718
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamic Effect A dynamic effect is a relative effect that uses a dynamic template which applies wave-forms around a base point to create a movement, for example a circle or ballyhoo. In the same way as the content effect, it is applied to any group or set.
PAGE 719
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Waveforms - Dynamic Templates & Tables Dynamics are a way of creating effects by assigning waveforms (sinus, saw etc) to intensity, color, movement or any other parameter. you can define custom tables. See Dynamics - Tables. Examples: The waveform will "run" the parameter it is assigned to, but you can still move the "base value" of the parameter that the Dynamic is working with.
PAGE 720
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Live Effects looks like this: Step around with arrow keys, press MODIFY to get a dropdown, or enter a number and press MODIFY. NOTE When you press MODIFY or enter a number it will be an absolute value or a Palette value - depending on the setting in Attribute Settings. See Play Settings - Attribute. Dynamic Effect Parameters A number of parameters are combined to define the result of applying a Dynamic Template to a channel Set or Group.
PAGE 721
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Size and Rate The Size relates to how much the values will vary in relation to the base point. Rate defines fast the result is. See Dynamics - Size & Rate. Offset The offset parameter distributes the channels along the waveform. See the example with 5 channels on a sine wave. See Dynamics - Relations & Distance. Delay Relation & Distance The Delay Relation defines when each channel starts in relation to the next.
PAGE 722
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamic Templates Dynamic Templates are definitions of waveforms applied to parameters used for Dynamic Effects. Open from the Browser >Effects >Dynamic Effect > Dynamic Templates. Dynamic Effect Library - Columns & Functions Column Input Function Effect [MODIFY] Starts the selected Effect for the currently selected channel(s). Text [MODIFY] Press MODIFY to activate and end text input. Parameters [MODIFY] Opens the Dynamic Template editor.
PAGE 723
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 3. Press INSERT to create a new Template. 4. Go to TEXT and press MODIFY to enter a name. Press MODIFY again to confirm. 5. Go to Parameters and press MODIFY to open the Template Editor. 6. Press INSERT to create a step. Each step contains the settings for a single parameter - for example, a pan/tilt effect would have two steps. See Dynamic Template Editor - Functions. Dynamic Template Editor - Functions Column Input Function Ch.
PAGE 724
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamic Tables The basic element of a Dynamic effect is a wave-form, or "table", that is assigned to the intensity or any other attribute parameter of a channel. A Sine wave, for example, will fade a parameter up/down continuously over/under the current Base Value. By changing the Rate and Size of this Sine Wave, you will affect the speed and value range of the result.
PAGE 725
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Browser >Effects >Dynamic Effects >Dynamic Table List Pressing MODIFY on a table opens the Dynamic Table Editor where you can insert and delete table values. You cannot have more than 64 points in a table.
PAGE 726
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 This is the Dynamic Table editor with a Step table.
PAGE 727
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Live Dynamics (old) This tab is used with the old Dynamic Effects package from Congo. See Dynamics (old). All parameters of running Dynamic Effects can be edited in the Live Dynamic Effects tab. This tab can be opened from the Browser (Browser >Live Dynamic Effects). The top right corner shows a pan/tilt monitor with a dot representing each channel. This is a visualisation for the Offset Relation, Delay Relation and Distance values.
PAGE 728
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Live Dynamic Effects - Columns Column Input Function Library [MODIFY] Opens a dropdown to select a Dynamic Effect from the Effect Library. Status No input Running status. Cannot be edited. Channels No input The amount of channels assigned to this Dynamic Effect. Size [#] [MODIFY] Set the size from 1-1000%. See Size & Rate Size Channel [#] [MODIFY] Assign a size channel. See Size & Rate Rate [#] [MODIFY] Set the rate from 1-1000%.
PAGE 729
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Old Dynamic Effects The old Dynamic Effects prior to Cobalt v5 are still compatible and work in the same way. They are much more limited, so we recommend you to use the new ones unless you are importing an older Play.
PAGE 730
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamics - Base Value When a Dynamic Effect is activated, it will run with the current position of the corresponding attribute or intensity as a Base Value. If you change this Base Value, the Dynamic Effect will follow. If you run a Preset with a Dynamic Effect and then run another Preset with a new base value, the default action is for the Dynamic Effect to fade out. Use the Keep Dynamics setting to allow the Dynamic Effect to play through Presets. See Record Keep Dynamics.
PAGE 731
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamics - Start Dynamics are activated for the currently selected channel(s). The current attribute and intensity values are used as the Base Value for the Dynamic Effect. A "D" will appear in the top right corner of the channel symbol. NOTE Activating a Dynamic Effect will "lock" the attributes and intensities of the selected channels to the Dynamic Effect. See Dynamics - Stop.
PAGE 732
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Start Dynamics From The Effect Library Node Action Key Feedback 1. Select the Browser [BROWSER] The Browser is selected and highlighted. If it was already selected it is closed. Press again to open. 2. Go to the Effect Library node Arrow keys Up/Down The Effect Library node is highlighted. 3. Open the Effect Library node Right arrow The Effect Library node is opened. 4. Select an Effect Down arrow The selected Effect is highlighted 5.
PAGE 733
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamics - Control The Dynamics Soft Key Page in the Main Display of the console facepanel is opened by pressing DYNAMICS in the Effects soft key page.
PAGE 734
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • Clear all Selected Dynamics (CLEAR SELECT) Delete All running Dynamics (DELETE ALL) See Dynamics - Stop. Dynamic Wheels - Size, Rate, Offset & Delay Wheels 1 and 2 are used to set Size and Rate for Live Dynamics. See Dynamics - Size & Rate. • • Select channels and set values. Set numerical values with # and Wheel Key. Wheels 3 and 4 are used to set Offset and Delay relations. See Dynamics - Relations & Distance. • Hold the key and use the wheel.
PAGE 735
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamics - Stop Dynamic Effects can be stopped in the following ways. • • • • • • Stop Dynamics manually Activate A Dynamic Stop Table Delete the Dynamic from Live Dynamic Effects Delete the Dynamic using the Dynamics display Fade in a Preset in the Main Playback Load a new Sequence to the Main Playback* *Providing the Auto-Stop parameter in the System Settings is set to ON. See System Settings.
PAGE 736
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Activate A Dynamic Stop Table Intensity Dynamics can only be stopped by assigning a Stop Intensity Table. There is a STOP I Dynamic in the Effect Library for this. 1. Select the channels 2. Assign the "STOP I" Effect (See Dynamics - Start) You can record this to the Preset in the A field of the Main Playback.When the Preset with this Stop Table is activated, the Intensities will fade the size of the Dynamic Effect using the IN time of this Preset.
PAGE 737
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 3. Press DELETE to stop (a popup will ask for confirmation) 4. Press MODIFY to confirm. Fade In A Preset In The Main Playback When a Preset with new attribute values is faded in the Main Playback, any active Dynamics for those attributes will be stopped. Load a new Sequence to the Main Playback When a new Sequence is loaded to the Main Playback, all running Dynamics are stopped the next time GO is pressed.
PAGE 738
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamics - Record Dynamic Effects are recorded in Presets for playback. • • • Only Dynamics that have changed or are started since you last pressed RECORD will be stored. Record Mode should be set to AUTOMATIC for attributes. A "Keep Dynamic" flag can be set to a Preset. This will allow the Dynamic to move to new base values without stopping the Dynamic.
PAGE 739
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record Keep Dynamics (New Base Value) Keep Dynamics will set a Keep Dynamics flag to an existing Preset. When this Preset is played back in a Sequence it will change the Base Values for a running Dynamic Effect without stopping it. There are two ways of setting this. From a checkbox in the Recording Popup, or from the Dynamics Soft Key page (described below). See The Recording Popup. 1.
PAGE 740
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 You can store to a different Preset by entering a number before Keep Dynam. The Preset has to be recorded first. NOTE You can set a Keep Dynamics flag for a parameter group (Focus, Color, Beam) by holding KEEP DYNAM and pressing either of these keys.
PAGE 741
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamics - Preset Dynamics Editor The Preset Dynamics Editor is identical to the Live Dynamics Editor. All editing functions are the same. See Dynamics - Edit Live Dynamic Effects . Function Key Feedback Open Preset Dynamics Editor for Preset # [#] [PRESET] & [DYN_EFFECT] Dynamic Editor for Preset # is opened.
PAGE 742
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamics - Size & Rate Each Dynamic Effect has a Size (amplitude) and Rate (frequency) value. It is possible to assign an intensity channel to each of them. You can set Size and Rate for running Dynamic Effects with the wheels in the Dynamics Soft Key Page. See Dynamics - Control. NOTE From 4.2 it is no longer possible to modulate the size or rate of a dynamic effect using another intensity dynamic effect on the size/rate channel.
PAGE 743
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Rate Sets the rate (frequency) of the waveforms in a Dynamic Effect. It is set from 0-1000%. You can also change this parameter with the second parameter wheel in the Dynamics Soft Key Page (press DYNAMICS in the Index Page). It can also be set in the Preset- and Live Dynamic Effects tabs. See Live Dynamic Effects and Preset Dynamic Effects Rate Channel Any channel can be set to control the Rate of a Dynamic Effect. At 50% it does not affect the Rate at all.
PAGE 744
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamics - Relations & Distance Offset Relation, Delay Relation and Distance set all channels to perform a Dynamic one after the other, or overlapping. These parameters can be set in the Live Attribute editor and from the Dynamic Display soft key page. Offset Relation Specifies when channels start in relation to the table assigned to them Offset is set in the Dynamic Effect views (Live and Preset).
PAGE 745
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 3. Let go of the Key to activate the current selection. Delay Relation & Distance Specify when channels start in relation to each other. Delay Relation and Distance are set in the Dynamic Effect views (Live and Preset). Press MODIFY in Delay Relation for a dropdown with the following options Action Description All All devices start at the same time. Evenly Spread The starting time is evenly delayed. 1:2-1:9 The selected devices are divided in # groups (1:#).
PAGE 746
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamics - Loop Count A Dynamic Effect can be set to run a specific number of loops and then stop automatically. If set to 0 it will run forever. This is done in the Loop Count column of the Dynamic Effects tabs.
PAGE 747
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamics - Fade A Dynamic Effect can fade in size, rate or both when played back in a Sequence. When faded manually in a Master Playback, size will follow the fader (0-100%). The Fade parameter is set in the Live and Preset Dynamic Effect tabs in the Fade column. Action Key Feedback Size (default) [MODIFY] Size will fade in (and out) on the time for the corresponding attribute. Rate [MODIFY] Rate will fade in (and out) on the time for the corresponding attribute.
PAGE 748
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamics - Form Form specifies the relation between the size for the Pan and Tilt parameters. It is used to control the behaviour of Pan/Tilt combinations like a Circle. Normal value is 100 (displayed as "F:F") which means that both Pan and Tilt are equal in size. • • If you enter a value between 0 and 99, this will be used as the size for the Pan parameter showed as "0:F" to "99:F".
PAGE 749
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamics - Fetch From A Preset Dynamics can be copied from any Preset. All channels with Dynamics in that Preset will be copied. Function Key Feedback Fetch Dynamics from Preset # [#] [ON/FETCH] & [DYN_EFFECT] Dynamics in Preset # are activated. A "D" will appear next to the involved channels in the Channel View.
PAGE 750
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamics - Playing Back A Preset with Dynamic Effects can be played back in any of these ways: • • • The Preset is faded in on a Sequence Step A Master with the Preset is faded up (size follows the Master fader). A Master with the Preset is Flashed General Facts • • • • • When activated, Dynamic Effects fade to the initial value including the Offset. If the attributes are masked, the Dynamic will start anyhow. Dynamics run until Deleted or Size is set to zero.
PAGE 751
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Dynamics - Store Running To Library Running Dynamics can be stored as a Dynamic Template in the Effect Library and be reused with different channels. 1. Open the Dynamic Effect Library by holding MODIFY and pressing DYN EFFECT, or from the Browser (Browser >Effect Library) 2. Go to the end of the list (arrow keys). 3. Press INSERT. You will get the question "Record running dynamics as a Dynamic Template?".
PAGE 752
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Image Effects Image effects allow you to map a text an image (jpg/gif) or an animation (supplied) to the intensity or color of a predefined effect layout of channels. This can be used to create abstract or absolute patterns. The result of mapping an image, animation or text will depend on the resolution of your effect layout. Image mapped to intensity and then color in a 10x10 layout.
PAGE 753
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • An effect layout An Image effect playback Create an image effect playback Creating an image effect playback can be done in two ways. • • # INSERT & EFFECT and select Image. Press INSERT in the Effect Playbacks List, and select Image. Now that the effect playback is created you need an Effect Layout to apply it to. Control image effects As soon as an Image effect is selected, you can control it in two ways: • • From the console parameter wheels using U1-U3.
PAGE 754
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE When you press MODIFY or enter a number it will be an absolute value or a Palette value - depending on the setting in Attribute Settings. See Play Settings - Attribute. Image effect parameters These are the image effect parameters divided into Content, Position, Color & Effect. CONTENT The content can be image, animation or text. It needs a layout to be mapped to, and you have to set if it is applied to intensity, color mix, iris or zoom.
PAGE 755
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 COLOR & EFFECT Both color and effect are "filters" applied on top of the content and all previous parameters. Red, green & Blue Colorization. Effect. size and speed The effect parameter allows you to scroll, shake and scale the content. You can adjust size and speed of the applied effect. Size and speed 50% is stopped and normal.
PAGE 756
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effect layouts An effect layout is the "projection screen" for an image effect. The effect layout is where you create a positional relationship among channels. This in turn determines how pixels from the source image will apply to channels. It is created in the Effect Layout editor, and the tools are a simpler versions of the Channel Layout tools. This is the effect layout editor with a simple ten by ten matrix array, this chapter describes how to creat it.
PAGE 757
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Create a new effect layout 1. Open the effect layout editor (Browser >Effects >Image Effects >Effect Layouts...). 2. Press INSERT. You will get a popup where you can define the width and height in "pixels". One pixel is the smallest possible resolution, and usually a single light source. 3. Press MODIFY in the Layout column of the new layout. This opens the layout editor tool.
PAGE 758
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effect layout wizard Wizard The wizard is the easiest way to create an array/matrix or circle of channels. It opens a popup where you can choose either of these.
PAGE 759
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Inserting a circle of channels HINT: Use the Stretch H and V wheels to trim the insertion. Effect Layout Editor wheels The wheels are used to spread the selected objects horizontally or vertically, and to change size or rotation. 1. Select channels (Cursor mode). 2. Use wheel to edit. Function Feedback Stretch H Objects are spread horizontally Stretch V Objects are spread vertically Size Object size is changed Rotate Object is rotated.
PAGE 760
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effect layout channel tools If the effect layout isn't symmetrical you can work with channels one by one with these tools. Select/channel • • The arrow tool is a select tool which you use to select channels for all other function. The channel tool is used to place channels on screen. Enter the number first then click. Insert & Delete These are the same as the keys on the console. • • Insert selected channels. Delete selected channels.
PAGE 761
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Copy & Paste These are the same as the keys on the console.
PAGE 762
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Align Align is the same as the ALIGN key on the console. It will open a popup with options for aligning the selected channels. Copy an effect layout You can copy effect layouts to make alternative versions. 1. Open the effect layout list (Browser >Effects >Image Effects >Effect Layouts...) 2. Select the layout you want to copy and press COPY/CUT. 3. Press PASTE.
PAGE 763
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effect Images Effect images are jpg or gif images that you can create with the Image tool, or import from a USB memory. They are mapped pixel by pixel to the effect layout when selected. In other words, if the effect layout consists of 100 light sources that are aligned 10x10 - you can create an image that is 10x10 to fit exactly, or 128x128 if you want to be able to scale and zoom in the image.
PAGE 764
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 2. Press INSERT to create a new image. You will get a popup 3. Enter the size of the image. The size is relevant to the size of the effect layout it will be applied to. We recommend 128x128 which you can scale to a lot of layouts. 4. Press MODIFY in the Image column of the new image. This opens the layout editor tool.
PAGE 765
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Edit an image The Effect Image Editor can be used to create new images and to edit imported images. It offers some simple drawing tools. All of them are mouse operated. Drawing tools The drawing tools are the pen and the select tool. The pen will draw with the selected colors and the select tool can be used to select an area and drag it to a different location. Zoom tool Click on the zoom tools to zoom in/out.
PAGE 766
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Copy an effect image You can copy effect images to make alternative versions. 1. Open the effect image list (Browser >Effects >Image Effects >Effect images...) 2. Select the image you want to copy and press COPY/CUT. 3. Press PASTE.
PAGE 767
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Effect Texts You can create a text and apply it to an effect layout with the image effect. The text can be applied to intensity, color mix, iris or zoom. This is an example of the letter "E" applied to intensity and then color mix in a 10x10 effect layout. Create an effect text 1. Open the Effect Text tool (Browser >Effects >Image Effect >Effect Texts...) 2. Press INSERT to create a new text. 3. Press MODIFY in the Text column, write a text and press MODIFY to confirm.
PAGE 768
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Import Effect Images You can import images (jpg/bmp/gif) from a USB memory. 1. Connect the USB memory to Cobalt 2. Open the Import Effect Images function (Browser >Effects >Image Effects >Import Effect Image). This will open the import image popup where you can select the image you want to import. 3 Press MODIFY. You will get a popup 4. Enter the target size of the image. The size is relevant to the size of the effect layout it will be applied to.
PAGE 769
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Channel Sets A Channel Set is a defined set of channels distributed into a number of parts so that you can distribute effects over a rig in a specific order, regardless if it is symmetrical or not. Sets can be used as an alternative to groups, in both content and dynamic effects. The advantage of a Channel Set compared to a group is that you can create very specific distribution models. See Channel Distribution Wizard. The Channels Sets editor can be opened in two ways.
PAGE 770
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Create a Set Sets are created in the Channel Sets editor. You can use the Channel Distribution Wizard, or create them one by one using all channel selection and Group features in Cobalt as a help. 1. Open the Channel Sets Editor. See above. Column Action Feedback Channel set No Input The number of this Set. Can't be changed. Text [MODIFY] Opens the text cell for labeling. Parts [MODIFY] Opens the Channel Distribution Wizard. 2.
PAGE 771
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE Helpful hint: Groups can be used to enter channel selections within parts, if desired. If you are making a very complicated Channel Set distribution, it may be easier to first create a Group that corresponds to the contents of each individual Part, and then use the Groups on masters or Direct Selects to simplify the entry of the channels in each part. . You can now use this set in any Content or Dynamic Effect Playback. Edit a Set Select the set using arrow keys.
PAGE 772
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Main Playback The Main Playback is a "theatre style" playback for sequences.
PAGE 773
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Main Playback - Introduction The Main Playback is the theatrical playback section of Cobalt. You can play back any of the 999 sequences, or any of the 9999.999 presets in random order.
PAGE 774
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Main Playback - Functions The Main Playback can play back a Sequence in normal/chase mode, or random presets. While a crossfade is being executed the "Playback" status at the lower right corner of all screens will be red. The main playback has the following controls. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. GO TO (live) and JUMP TO B (blind) will accept a numeric argument for going directly to any part of the sequence. REFRESH to refresh values to those of the Playback.
PAGE 775
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Main Playback - Transport Keys These are the transport keys of the Main Playback.
PAGE 776
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE Device parameters are executed as LTP, independent of the playback that once started them. This means that you cannot use (for example) PAUSE to stop attributes.
PAGE 777
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Main Playback - Manual Crossfades Move the crossfaders from the down position to the up position to perform a manual crossfade. When both reach the top position the crossfade is terminated and the next sequence step is advanced. (See Main Playback - Introduction). General Facts • • • • • Take over timed fades manually. Press GO during a manual fade. Set the crossfaders to fade in both directions in the Settings for the Playback (Hold SETUP and press PLAYBACK).
PAGE 778
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Main Playback - Edit Keys A, B and PLAYBACK are the main editing keys of the Main Playback, they can be used in conjunction with numerical entries and other prefix keys. Function Key Connect the Active (A) field to the channel controls, and open the A Tab [A] Connect the Next (B) field to the channel controls, and open the B Tab [B] Load Preset # to A. [#] [PRESET] & [A] Load Preset # to B.
PAGE 779
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Main Playback - Time Settings Hold SETUP and press TIME to open the Settings. Setting Feedback Set times to Times are set to the step in B (default). You can set them to the step in A as well. Time: Use % as default Times for FCB will be set in % of the main fade time. Default Go time The default time that is only used if no time is set, is set to 5 seconds. Default Go Back time The default time is set to 2 seconds.
PAGE 780
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Main Playback - Default Settings Hold SETUP and press PLAYBACK to open these settings. These are the default settings for the functions of the Main Playback. Setting Feedback Modify Sequence When active, this mode will suppress all wait times and master links. Build Sequence When active (default) all presets recorded in A (Live) will be added to the sequence.
PAGE 781
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Main Playback - Refresh Functions The REFRESH key in the Main Playback can be used to refresh any part of a channel to the resulting state of the current Sequence Step in the Main Playback.
PAGE 782
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Playback View Press PLAYBACK in the Main Playback section to open the Playback tab. The Playback views normally have a packed format like this. There is an unpacked format as well (see below). 1. Current sequence step, on stage. 2. Next sequence step to be faded in. 3. A graphical representation of the times in the next step to be faded in. 4. Notes are shown with a yellow flag and displayed to the left of the graphical view for the next step.
PAGE 783
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Standard Times are described like this Out: # In: # Time (In=Out): # Delay In: # (with a "d", for example d2 >3) Delay Out: # (with a "d", for example d2 >3) TimeCode: ##.##.##.## Channel Times - are summarised as ChT: #. The # indicates how many different time groups there are in a step. 9. Header box, showing information about the currently loaded sequence (click to change) 10. On screen transport keys 11. Settings. 12. Mode indicators. 13. Extras in this sequence step.
PAGE 784
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequence Playback Views - Column Format It is possible to show the information in the Playback view in a traditional columnised format, instead of the packed default format. You can toggle this view on/off by holding FORMAT and pressing the RIGHT or LEFT arrow. Delay Times An < or > character points to the time that will be delayed. If there are two delay times, the out delay is shown and < > characters indicate that there are two delay times defined.
PAGE 785
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Sequence Editor Hold MODIFY and press PLAYBACK in the Main Playback section to open the Sequence Editor for the sequence in the Main Playback. See Sequences - Sequence List.
PAGE 786
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Load Sequence The node Browser >Main Playback >Load Sequence opens a dialogue that allows you to load any recorded Sequence to the Main Playback. Tap or press MODIFY to activate. You can also touch or click on the Playback view in the top left part, where the number of the currently loaded sequence is displayed.
PAGE 787
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Independents The independents are potentiometers and keys that can be set up to control lights that you want to separate from the main controls - such as houselights, work lights etc.
PAGE 788
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Independents - Introduction The Independents offer a control surface for potentiometers and keys to which you can assign channels that can be excluded from normal control and recording. In Cobalt there are six independent potentiometers. These can be used for • • • Adding light (inclusive mode) Removing light (inhibit mode) Independent lights (Exclusive mode) There are three independent keys.
PAGE 789
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Independent Dock Areas The content of Independents can be assigned to a dock area.
PAGE 790
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Using the Independents Action Console Feedback 1. Open the Setup* Hold Setup and move the potentiometer or press a key** A popup will appear with a channel view*** 3. Select Mode [MODIFY] See Independent Modes 4. Select Execute Arrow key Execute is highlighted 5. Store [MODIFY] The popup is closed 2. Set channels, levels and attributes *The Setup can be opened from the Browser as well (Browser >Independents) **Keys have the option to be toggling on/off.
PAGE 791
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Independent Modes Mode Screen Feedback Exclusive Blue level Blackout, GrandMaster, Capture or any other channel function will not affect this channel(s). Inclusive No indication Works as an additional Master Playback Inhibit Red level Is an Inhibit Master - works as a Grand Master for the selected channel(s).* *If you have several Independent Functions set to Inhibit and they have overlapping channels, the highest Special Function will be in control.
PAGE 792
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Independent Dock Area Dock areas are configured by holding SETUP and pressing BROWSER.
PAGE 793
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 It is possible to select Independents and set levels from the dock with the MASTER key. Function Keys Feedback Select an Independent [#] [MASTER] Independent # is selected and highlighted. Add [#] [+] Independent # is added. Add a range [#] [THRU] Up to Independent # are added. Subtract [#] [-] Independent # is subtracted. Set a level [#] [@LEVEL] The Independent levels are set to #. Set a level [Wheel] The Independent levels are set to #.
PAGE 794
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters There are 80 Master Playbacks that can be used to playback any type of content such as channels, groups, effects, presets, sequences or console keys, macros and moving device parameters.
PAGE 795
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Introduction The masters are incredibly flexible and powerful. You can set them up individually in a number of different modes and play back virtually any type of content that can be programmed in Cobalt. All of the 80 master playbacks can be controlled virtually by number. Physically you can access them depending on your choice of hardware. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
PAGE 796
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 797
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Functions These are the master functions.
PAGE 798
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Playback - Functions These are the transport keys for the Master Playback in the masters section.
PAGE 799
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Settings You can define master settings from the Master Settings popup or directly from the console if you have the full wing or big Cobalt. & See Master Settings from the console. All settings for masters are individual per master. You can define behaviours for the • • • • • • Fader Flash key Master key Contribution to the Live output Contribution to recording functions Priorities against other playbacks Master settings are described per content type in this chapter.
PAGE 800
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 The dialog has three tabs: Basic, Buttons and Faders. Master Mode These are the main modes that define the basic behaviour of a master playback. Mode Screen Feedback Exclusive Blue level Blackout, GrandMaster, Capture or any other channel function will not affect this channel(s). Inclusive No indication Works as an additional Master Playback Inhibit Red level Is an Inhibit Master - works as a Grand Master for the selected channel(s).
PAGE 801
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE When you are in "exclusive" mode, the attributes will still be "stolen" back by any function calling them from the rest of the console, even if the intensity is "exclusive". If you wish to stop this from happening enable Active Parameter Lock. See Master fader settings. Exclude Record This setting excludes the contribution of this master to the live output, from recording functions.
PAGE 802
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 803
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Mode Applies to Feedback Fader type Ch, group, preset, effect Add = Intensities are piled (HTP) on top of the output. Attributes are LTP. Solo = The content of this fader replaces all other master faders, but does not affect levels coming from the Main Playback.
PAGE 804
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 will follow the fader Execute at #% = attributes are executed when the fader passes #%. Active parameter lock Preset, effect Attributes cannot be stolen by another master or the Main Playback. Manual control is still possible. Return to (FCB) Preset, effect Defines what attributes will return to at fade down.
PAGE 805
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Flash type Mode Applies to Feedback Add Ch, group, preset, effect Intensities are piled (HTP) on top of the output. Attributes are LTP. Solo Ch, group, preset, effect The content of this fader replaces all other master faders and returns other faders based on the Momentary/Latching mode setting.
PAGE 806
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Settings From the Console Hold FLASH MODE and use the page keys to step through the settings per master. Use the Master key to toggle the settings per master. You can check and set master settings directly from the Cobalt console or Congo Jr Master Playback Wing. Universal Fader Wings and Congo Kid do not support this feature.
PAGE 807
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Commands Enter the number of a master and press MASTER to control this master on the level wheel. You can select a group of masters and set levels numerically from the keypad, similar to how channels, effects and groups can be selected. Select masters and set levels It is possible to select masters and set levels with the MASTER key PROVIDING a Master View is open and selected. Keyboard shortcut = F8.
PAGE 808
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE Adjustments made in this field are live if the master's fader is above zero. When there is an unsaved change the grey title bar will be purple and you will get an option of saving before closing or leaving this tab To edit attributes in this tab, press ATTRIB. Editing Attributes opens the Preset Attribute Editor tab. Edits to attributes are blind, and the fader must be brought to zero before those changes will appear on the master.
PAGE 809
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Select channels in a master Press a Master key to select all channels in the Ch, Preset, Effect or Group of that Master. Function Keys Feedback Select channels [Master_Key] All channels in Master # are selected in the Channel Control. Select channels in with a level [ALL] & [Master_Key] All channels in Master # with a level in the Channel Control are selected. Add channels [+] & [Master_Key] All channels in Master # are added to the selection in the Channel Control.
PAGE 810
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Clear Hold C/ALT and press a Master Key to clear its content. & These are more functions to clear content and fader levels in master playbacks. Function Keys Feedback Clear [C/Alt & [Master_Key] The content of the Master Playback is cleared. Clear all [C/Alt & [PAGE] The Master Playbacks are cleared. Set all to zero [C/Alt & [MASTER] OR [C/Alt & [LIVE] [LIVE] All Master Playbacks are set to zero, no content is cleared.
PAGE 811
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Times Masters can have In, wait and out times. These times can be used by • • • • Flash on time Master Links The START function Manual fades Set In-Wait-Out times for a Master In times can be set with a key shortcut. Wait and out times are set from the master editor. In Time Function Keys Feedback Set In time [#] [TIME] & [Master_Key] The time # is assigned to the Master as an In time. In, Wait and Out time These times can only be assigned from the Master List. 1.
PAGE 812
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Flash On Time When Flash On Time is activated, the Master Playbacks will flash on the time assigned to each playback. See Master Playbacks - Times. Function Keys Feedback 1. Open the Master Setup [SETUP] & [Master_Key] The Master Settings are opened 2. Select Flash On Time Arrow keys Flash On Time box is highlighted 3. Activate [MODIFY] Flash On Time box is checked 4.
PAGE 813
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Channels Hold CHANNEL and press a Master Key to load and play back single channels (Ch#) so several masters starting from the first pressed, or GROUP and Master key to load a group of channels (Chs) to any master playback. They are stored in the current Master Page.
PAGE 814
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Settings for channels These are the settings you can change for masters with channel content. Hold SETUP and press the Master key to open the settings.
PAGE 815
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Please note that some settings will make other settings invalid - for example, if you set a master to Inhibit, the main function will be inhibit. Function Function Mode Inclusive = playback interacts with other playbacks Inhibit = fader limits the output of the ch's Exclusive = fader "owns" channel intensities Exclude Int From Record Excludes intensity from recording.
PAGE 816
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Presets Enter the number, hold PRESET and press a Master Key to load to that Master. You can record, load and play back presets from master playbacks. Since these are the most common type of content they are displayed only with the number in the master displays.
PAGE 817
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Load a preset to a master These functions are used to load presets to masters. Function Keys Feedback Load a preset [#] [PRESET] & [Master_Key] Preset # is loaded.
PAGE 818
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record a preset to a master 1. Select channels (selection) or select none (all) to record. OPTION: Enter a preset number. If you don't the next free last used for masters will be suggested. 2. Hold RECORD & Master key. 3. Enter a preset text (optional) and press RECORD again. The return to preset is shown in the master display and master view.
PAGE 819
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record a return preset to a master 1. Select channels (selection) or select none (all) to record. OPTION: Enter a preset number. If you don't the next free last used for masters will be suggested. 2. Hold RECORD & Master key. Use the right arrow to select Return To. 3. Enter a preset text (optional) and press RECORD again.
PAGE 820
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record a preset to a sequence in a master 1. Select channels (selection) or select none (all) to record. OPTION: Enter a preset number. If you don't the next free last used for masters will be suggested. 2. Hold RECORD & Master key. Use the right arrow to select Sequence. 3. Enter a preset text, Sequence name, and step text (optional) and press RECORD again.
PAGE 821
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master settings for presets These are the settings you can change for masters with preset content. Hold SETUP and press the Master key to open the settings.
PAGE 822
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Please note that some settings will make other settings invalid - for example, if you set a master to Inhibit, the main function will be inhibit.
PAGE 823
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Groups Enter the number, hold GROUP and press a Master Key to load to that Master. You can load and play back groups from master playbacks. They are displayed with a "Gr" before the number in the master displays.
PAGE 824
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master settings for groups These are the settings you can change for masters with group content. Hold SETUP and press the Master key to open the settings.
PAGE 825
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Please note that some settings will make other settings invalid - for example, if you set a master to Inhibit, the main function will be inhibit. Function Function Mode Inclusive = playback interacts with other playbacks Inhibit = fader limits the output of the group Exclusive = fader "owns" group intensities Exclude Int.
PAGE 826
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Effects Enter the number, hold EFFECT and press a Master Key to load to that Master. You can load and play back effects from master playbacks. They are displayed with a "E" before the number in the master displays. Once an effect is loaded to a master you can • • • Use the master fader to set the level Use the flash key to flash the group (if it has levels) Use the master key to select the effect An effect contains effect attributes.
PAGE 827
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master settings for effects These are the settings you can change for masters with effect content. Hold SETUP and press the Master key to open the settings.
PAGE 828
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Please note that some settings will make other settings invalid - for example, if you set a master to Inhibit, the main function will be inhibit. Function Function Mode Inclusive = playback interacts with other playbacks Inhibit = fader limits the output of the preset ch's Exclusive = fader "owns" preset intensities Exclude Int from Record Excludes intensity from this master from recording.
PAGE 829
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Palettes Enter the number, hold FOCUS, COLOR, BEAM, PALETTE and press a Master Key to load to that Master. You can load and activate palettes from master playbacks. They are displayed with a "Fo,Co, Be, Pa" before the number in the master displays.
PAGE 830
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Play back palettes from a master Palettes are activated with the master key or the fader, for the currently selected channel(s).
PAGE 831
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Sequences Enter the number, hold SEQUENCE and press a Master Key to load to that Master. You can record, load and play back sequences from master playbacks. They are displayed with an "S" before the number in the master displays.
PAGE 832
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record a sequence to a master When you record a second preset to a master, or if a sequence is loaded to a master - you will get the option to continue to record to that sequence using the same recording logic as when you record to the sequence in the Main Playback. Record a preset to a sequence in a master 1. Select channels (selection) or select none (all) to record. OPTION: Enter a preset number. If you don't the next free last used for masters will be suggested. 2.
PAGE 833
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 834
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Please note that some settings will make other settings invalid - for example, if you set a master to Inhibit, the main function will be inhibit.
PAGE 835
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 You can select the following options A+B The sequence master and the next higher master will control the sequence as an A/B playback providing a crossfader pair, just like when a sequence is controlled from the Main Playback. Int + A/B The first master controls the intensity of the sequence, and the second is a combined A/B crossfader. The default button settings (press MODIFY on "Button settings for dual fader mode) are those listed in the dialog above.
PAGE 836
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Simpler master wing displays: The linked A/B master shows the sequence number in parenthesis to indicate that the master is occupied. NOTE The Dual Fader mode setting can be selected also in the Master List (Browser >Masters >Master List).
PAGE 837
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Chase mode sequences Enter the number, hold SEQUENCE and press a Master Key to load to that Master. You can load and play back sequences in "chase" mode from master playbacks. They are displayed with a "C" before the number in the master displays.
PAGE 838
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Load a chase sequence to a master These functions are used to load chase mode sequences to masters. Function Keys Feedback Load a chase [#] [SEQ] & [Master_Key] Chase # is loaded to the Master Playback. The number and name are shown in the master display. [#] [SEQ] & [Master_Keys] Hold SEQ and keep pressing new Master keys to load the next stored Sequence/Chase. Load several chases NOTE You can load a Chase directly from the Sequences List as well.
PAGE 839
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master settings for chase mode sequences These are the settings you can change for masters with sequence content. Hold SETUP and press the Master key to open the settings.
PAGE 840
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Please note that some settings will make other settings invalid - for example, if you set a master to Inhibit, the main function will be inhibit. Function Function Mode Inclusive = playback interacts with other playbacks Inhibit = fader limits the output of the group Exclusive = fader "owns" intensities Exclude Int.
PAGE 841
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Dynamics Enter the number, hold DYN EFFECT and press a Master Key to load to that Master. You can load and activate dynamic templates direct from master playbacks. These are temporary data stored in the current Master Page. They are displayed with an "Dy" before the number in the master displays. Once a dynamic template is loaded to a master you can • Use the master key to activate the dynamic effect for the currently selected channel(s).
PAGE 842
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Channel Layouts From the CONTENT column in the Master List (Browser) you can load a Channel Layout to a Master. You can load and activate channel layouts direct from master playbacks. These are temporary data stored in the current Master Page. They are displayed with an "La" before the number in the master displays. Once a channel layout is loaded to a master you can • Use the master key to activate it for the currently selected channel view.
PAGE 843
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Load a channel layout to a master Channel Layouts can only be assigned from the Master List. 1. Open the master list (Browser >Masters >MasterList). 2. Set "Content Type" to "Layout" 3. Set "Content" to the number of the layout you wish to assign.
PAGE 844
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Attribute parameters Hold a Wheel Parameter key and press a Master Key to load to that Master. You can load and activate attribute parameters from master playbacks. This is very useful for parameters that map well to faders, like iris, focus, shutters and color mixing. They are displayed with a "Pm" before the number in the master displays.
PAGE 845
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Console keys From the CONTENT column in the Master List (Browser) you can load any console key to a Master. You can assign any console key to a master playback. This is useful if there is a soft key you are using a lot like "select 2nd" or "DATA", so you have fast access to it. Console keys are displayed with a "Ke" and the key function, in the master displays.
PAGE 846
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Assign a console key to a master Console keys can only be assigned from the Master List. 1.Open the master list using [MODIFY] & [MASTER] or from the Browser >Masters >MasterList. 2. Set "Content Type" to "key" 3. Set "Content" to the key of your choice.
PAGE 847
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Macros From the CONTENT column in the Master List (Browser) you can load any console key to a Master. You can assign a macro key to a master playback so you have fast access to it. Macro keys are displayed with a "Ma" and its text, in the master displays. Once a macro key is loaded to a master you can • Use the master key as the macro key Assign a macro to a master Console keys can only be assigned from the Master List. 1.
PAGE 848
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Drag and Drop Data There are many ways of moving around data between masters. Drag and drop is one of them. It can be useful if you want to reorganize the content of your masters. • • • You can drag a channel selection from any channel view to a master. You can drag any type of object that can be loaded to a master from the Browser You can move content between masters. Note that all master settings will be moved along with the content.
PAGE 849
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 If there is content in a master field, you will get a dialogue for overwriting: Drag and Drop Master Links You can create a master link in a sequence by dragging the master from the master view to the sequence step. The master will be linked with a target level or 100% if it is over 50% when linked, and a target level of 0% if it is under 50% when linked. You can double-click the master link in the Playback view to edit it.
PAGE 850
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 See Sequence Step Links - Master Playbacks.
PAGE 851
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Swap upper/lower Press SWAP to interchange the content and levels of the upper row of master faders with the lower row. Playback content and fader levels are matched with the motorized faders. Press again to swap back.
PAGE 852
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Select Playback Range Press and hold RANGE to be able to select which bank, or range of master playbacks you wish to control from the physical faders and pots. There are 80 master playbacks available at all times in the system. The principle of Fader Ranges: You can press the displays or the keys above/under.
PAGE 853
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Fader Modes Press and hold FADER MODE to be able to select different operational modes for the master section. You can press the displays or the keys above/under.
PAGE 854
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Fader Mode - Masters Press FADER MODE to select default Masters mode. You can press the displays or the keys above/under. In Masters mode the lower row of motorized faders control masters 1-20, and the upper row of pots control masters 21-40.
PAGE 855
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Fader Mode - Two Scene Masters Hold FADER MODE and select TWO SCENE to activate Two Scene Masters. Two scene masters takes old school improvisation where channels could be preset blind and then faded onto stage to a new level. • • The top twenty master faders are blind (1) The lower twenty masters are live (2) You can set up and record anything on the top masters, and then fade on your choice of fade time into these settings.
PAGE 856
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Fading Two Scene Masters To fade the settings and content of the top row of masters (blind) into the bottom row of masters (live) press START or GO on the Masters Playback. You can enter a time before pressing START or GO. This time will continue to be used until a new time is entered. NOTE Any changes you make to content in the top masters will be loaded to the bottom live masters, but ONLY if the fader of the master is over zero %.
PAGE 857
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Create new looks in Blind and record to masters One way of improvising on the fly in two-scene masters mode is to use the Blind field to create new looks, record them to the top masters and fade into them. 1. Press BLIND to activate the blind tab. 2. Select the channels and moving devices you want to modify blind, and use the parameter wheels and palette functions to create a look. 3. Hold RECORD and press a Master key for a master in the top row to record to that master.
PAGE 858
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Fader Mode - Expanded Masters Hold FADER MODE and select EXPANDED MASTERS to activate. You can press the displays or the keys above/under. Expanded Masters will use the whole "strip of controls" for one master playback - providing expanded control for 20 masters at a time. See Masters - Introducion.
PAGE 859
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 In Expanded Masters mode you can set the buttons and faders and pots to the functions of your choice. See Masters - Settings.
PAGE 860
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Fader Mode - Expanded Effects Hold FADER MODE and select EXPANDED EFFECTS to activate. You can press the displays or the keys above/under. Select ALL for all effect playbacks and ACTIVE for all active effect playbacks at the moment of selecting this mode. Expanded Effects will use the whole "strip of controls" for one master playback - providing expanded control for 20 masters at a time. . See Masters - Introducion.
PAGE 861
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 In Expanded Effects mode you can set the buttons and faders and pots to the functions of your choice. See Masters - Settings.
PAGE 862
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Fader Mode - Expanded Sequences Hold FADER MODE and select EXPANDED SEQUENCES to activate. You can press the displays or the keys above/under. Select ALL for all sequence playbacks and ACTIVE for all active sequence playbacks at the moment of selecting this mode. Expanded Sequences will use the whole "strip of controls" for one master playback - providing expanded control for 20 masters at a time. . See Masters - Introducion.
PAGE 863
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 In Expanded Sequences mode you can set the buttons and faders and pots to the functions of your choice. See Masters - Settings.
PAGE 864
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master View Press MASTER to open the Master View. The Master View is a graphical view of the content in the master playbacks. It has several formats and is zoomable. (Browser >Masters >Master View) 1. 2. 3. 4.
PAGE 865
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE Master Views can be assigned to a dock area. See Configure Dock Areas. Using a mouse or trackball Function Keys Feedback Using a mouse click Click to select and hold right key and move to set levels. Click to add more, double-click to deselect all but the last clicked. Open the Master Editor [MODIFY] & click The Master Editor is opened.
PAGE 866
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 The currently selected format is indicated in the top right corner of each Master View. NOTE In the All format there is a header bar visible for each row of masters that shows information about the currently selected master page.
PAGE 867
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master List Hold MODIFY and press MASTER to open the Master List, a spreadsheet editor for all master fields where you can change settings and assign content to several fields at the same time.
PAGE 868
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Masters - Content You can play back almost any kind of content from a Master Playback. The content can be loaded directly or from the Master Editor. See Load/Clear & Master Editor. Content Function Prs Play back Preset from fader, select channels with Master key. Flash with Flash key. Chs Single channels or several channels as a temporary selection (previously called Grp). Seq Play back Sequences. The Master key is Go. The fader is a Grand Master for that Sequence.
PAGE 869
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Pages Master Pages store all content for 20 masters and can be used used in any row of 20 Master Playback Faders, eg the upper (21-40) or lower (1-20) rows.
PAGE 870
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Pages - Introduction You can store all content of 20 Master Playbacks into a Master Page. Master Pages can be stepped through, or loaded. General Functionality • • • • • • Master Pages are stored for 20 Master Playbacks. Page 1 & 2 are automatically loaded when creating a new Play. You can store up to 999 Master Pages. Each Page can have a text label. A Page can be Transparent - meaning empty Master Playbacks are not cleared when this page is loaded.
PAGE 871
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Pages - Record All content changes in the affected Master Range (1-20 or 21-40) are automatically recorded when Auto-Update is On (default). They can be recorded manually to the same Page or to another Page as well. Function Key Feedback Record to the currently loaded Master Page [RECORD] & [PAGE] You will get a confirmation in the message window at the bottom of the screens.
PAGE 872
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Pages - Functions It is possible to load and change Master Pages separately to any bank (1-20, 21-40, 41-60, 61-80) of Master Playbacks. When a new play is created Page 1-4 are automatically loaded. Press PAGE to activate the page direct select keys in the master displays.
PAGE 873
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Pages - List You can view, edit and create Master Pages directly in the Master Page List (BROWSER >Masters >Master Pages). NOTE The system always creates 10 empty Master Pages when a new Play is opened. Master Pages List - Columns Column Input Function Page No input The number of this Page cannot be edited. Text ABCDE... Press MODIFY to activate and end text input. Transparent [MODIFY] When ON this Master Page will only load the stored masters.
PAGE 874
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Pages List - Functions These are the functions in the Master Pages List Function Key Feedback Insert a Master Page [INSERT] Inserts a new Master Page with the next free number Insert Master Page # [#] [INSERT] Inserts a new Master Page # Delete the selected Master Page [DELETE] Deletes the selected Master Page. Cannot be undone.
PAGE 875
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Pages - Editor In the Master Page Editor you can view and edit the content and times of Master Pages. Open in Browser> Masters >Master Pages> Master Page #. You can use copy and paste to make a copy of an existing master page.
PAGE 876
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Page - Columns Column Input Function Master No input The number of this Master - cannot be edited. Content Type* [MODIFY] Opens a dropdown where you can choose content. Content [MODIFY] Sets the number ID of the content in the previous column. In [#] [MODIFY] Sets an In time. If there is no other time it is also an out time.
PAGE 877
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Pages - Times Master Playback times can be stored in Master Pages. Times are set from 0.1seconds to 49.59 minutes (0.1- 4959). General Facts • • • A Master Playback can have an in/wait/out time. A Master Page can have a general time used for all Palettes and Presets. A Master Page can have a BPM time for all Chases. Master Page Times - In, Out, Wait Fade times for a Master Playback can be stored in a Master Page.
PAGE 878
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Page Times - BPM The Master Page BPM will affect all chasers running in that Master Page. Function Keys Feedback Set Master Page BPM* [TAP] & [PAGE] Tap at least two times to set a BPM. You can edit it in the Master Page List. *If chases have a rate, it will be scaled by the BPM.
PAGE 879
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Pages - Auto-update Mode This is the default mode for Master Pages - in which all changes automatically are stored to the current Master Page. Function Keys Feedback 1. Open the Master Page Settings [SETUP] & [PAGE] The Master Page Settings popup is opened. 2. Toggle Auto-update [MODIFY] MODIFY will toggle this parameter on/off. NOTE Without this mode, Master Pages have to be recorded manually. See Record Master Pages.
PAGE 880
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master Pages - Display List This is a list that shows all Master Pages in the ML display of the Console mimic dock. For more information see Display Lists. Function Keys Feedback 1. Open the Master Page Display List [DISP] & [PAGE] The Master Page Display List for a Master Row (120, 21-40) is opened. 2. Select a Master Page Screen or mouse The selected item is highlighted with >arrows<. 3.
PAGE 881
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Remote Controls There are different remote control systems for Cobalt. Each one has it's own working field. This is where you can set/edit and clear these fields, and rename the remotes. Remote Controls node This chapter contains the following sections • • Clear Remotes Remote Control List All different types of remote controls are described in Accessories - Remote Control.
PAGE 882
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Clear Remotes Select this node and press MODIFY to clear all intensities set in remote fields. This function is available in the Misc Soft Key Menu as well.
PAGE 883
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Remote Control List Open from BROWSER >Remote Controls >Remotes List. This editor shows all active remote controls. You have the possibility to give names to each Remote control (currently only possible on Net3 RFR devices) and disable the contribution from specific remotes. In Settings: System, you can set all remote input to off. See Play Settings - System. • • • • If you press MODIFY in the Clear Levels column, you can quickly clear all levels from that remote.
PAGE 884
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Media The Media node contains tutorial movies, images of your choice, software documentation and Training Projects.
PAGE 885
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Media - Introduction The Media node of the Browser has four nodes. Each of them represent a folder with the same name in the CONGO folder at the root of the system. Information dropped in these folders can be viewed in the Tabs of Cobalt. Function File Types Explanation Movies wmw These are tutorials. The movies are played when a movie node is selected. Images jpg Images are loaded in a Tab when an image node is selected.
PAGE 886
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Movies In the movies folder there are tutorials for learning Cobalt. Mostly, they are around five minutes and in English. You start them by selecting them and pressing MODIFY or ENTER. NOTE Do not watch movies in the console during playback. You can import movies from a USB memory stick or a digital camera by connecting it to Cobalt and selecting "Import Images.." from the Browser >Media >Import Images node.
PAGE 887
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Images You can import images from a USB memory stick or a digital camera by connecting it to Cobalt and selecting "Import Images.." from the Browser >Media >Import Images node. NOTE This works for cameras that show up as a new Drive in Windows (not as a camera device). Media Images - Delete You can delete images directly from the Browser by pressing DELETE.
PAGE 888
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Training Projects This is visualisation plug-in for training purposes. The projects are created in a third-party software called Capture and supplied by ETC. The idea is not to run large shows with processor-heavy visualisation inside Cobalt. It is meant as a training tool that allows you to understand functions like Dynamic Effects without having a rig. Training Projects - Open Project Opening a Training Project 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
PAGE 889
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Training Projects - The Camera There is a camera (viewing angle) that allows you to zoom, pan and rotate the "stage". There are some default functions connected to the FORMAT key of Cobalt, and some functions are accessible by patching the camera as a Device to a channel. Default functions Camera does not have to be patched as a DMX device. Function Key Feedback Zoom [FORMAT] & Wheel The view is zoomed in/out from the camera.
PAGE 890
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Training Projects - Hints The Training Project is a simple way of getting to know some of the moving light functionality of Cobalt, and to understand Dynamics. In the corresponding Cobalt Play (A Demo Play) there is a sample of a Channel Layout that can be used together with the Plug-in. If you are running one monitor and split the screens you will have a view like this.
PAGE 891
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 CONSOLE KEYS This Chapter is about the console key functions, keyboard equivalents and shortcuts. Its a very useful chapter.
PAGE 892
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key Quick Help These are all console keys with a short explanation and a summary of functions, in alphabetical order. • • • This text is linked to each key in the console and opens if you hold [?] and press a key. There are links to the corresponding chapters of the manual. The keyboard equivalent in an alphanumeric keyboard is listed. Console Key - ? This is the HELP function. It activates the online help system, which is a complete electronic copy of the user manual.
PAGE 893
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 NOTE If the console is set to operate in At Mode this key has a slightly different syntax. See Channels Command Syntax . For more information see Set Channel levels. Keyboard equivalent: [+] Console Key - A Opens the channel view for the A field of the Main Playback. The channel control will be connected to the A field. • • [A] - Opens and selects the A tab. [TIME] & [A] - Forces the setting "Times to A" For more information see Main Playback - Edit Keys.
PAGE 894
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - Arrow Keys The arrow keys are a vital part of all navigating functions, and are used a lot in combination with the silver colored navigating keys, and the level wheel. • • • • • • [Arrow keys] - Move in the direct of that key in the Browser, or a spreadsheet view. In dialogue boxes the side arrows will move between tabs, and up and down will select input areas.
PAGE 895
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - ATTRIB The ATTRIB key is used to record, edit and view attributes for moving devices. • • • • [ATTRIB] - Opens the Live Attribute view. [#] [RECORD] & [ATTRIB] - Record all attributes for the currently selected channels to preset #. [#] [PRESET] & [ATTRIB] - Opens the attribute editor for that preset. [SETUP] & [ATTRIB] - Opens the attribute settings.
PAGE 896
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - BANK The BANK key is used to change bank of data in the Direct Select key sections. Hold [BANK] - When this key is held, you can use the direct select keys to select a bank (1-10, 11-20 etc) for each section of direct select keys. For more information see Direct Select - Content. There is no keyboard equivalent. Console Key - BEAM This key is used to record and recall Beam palettes for moving devices.
PAGE 897
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • [BROWSER] - Select the Browser. If it is already selected, it will be closed. Press again to open. - Use the [up/down arrows] to navigate, and in combination with the level wheel to speed scroll. - Use the [right arrow] to open an item. - Use the [left arrow] to jump to the top of the current item and close it. - Press [MODIFY] to open the editor for an item. - Press [LOAD] to activate items like Groups, Palettes etc. - Hold [SETUP] and press [BROWSER] to activate more Dock Areas.
PAGE 898
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Keyboard equivalent: [C/Alt Console Key - CH ONLY MODE The CH ONLY MODE key is used to activate the Channels Only Mode for the console, providing a single scene single channel control for simple hands on. The patch is active. • [CH_ONLY_MODE] - Toggles Channels Only Mode on/off. For more information see Channels - Ch Only Mode.
PAGE 899
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - CHAN DELAY CH DELAYT is a soft key in the TIME menu of the console main display. It is used to record individual channel delay times. Times are recorded to the Sequence Step in A or B depending on the setting of Times. • [#] [CH DELAY] - Record that time to the currently selected channel(s). For more information see Sequence Times - Channel Times. There is no keyboard equivalent.
PAGE 900
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - CHECK The CHECK - key is used for the Channel Check function. • [CHECK -] - Make a channel check to the previous channel with the current level. No keyboard equivalent Console Key - CLEAR CHANGED CLEAR CHANGED is a soft key in the DEVICE menu of the console main display. It is used together with the attribute record setting "Changed" to clear the Set Changed flag on parameters that have been changed, so they will not be recorded.
PAGE 901
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • • [ENCODER] (press) - set to 100/zero. [ENCODER] (turn) - set value. [#] [ENCODER] (press) - set to value. For more information see Masters - Introduction There is no keyboard equivalent Console Key - COLOR This key is used to record and recall Color palettes for moving devices. • • • • • [RECORD] & [COLOR] - Record the next free palette for the currently selected devices. [#] [RECORD] & [COLOR] - Record a new palette for the currently selected devices.
PAGE 902
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 For more information see Presets - Compare Mode. There is no keyboard equivalent. Console key - CONNECT The CONNECT key is used to connect a Master with a Sequence to the Master Playback controls of the console frontpanel. A Playback tab will be opened for this master. • [CONNECT] & [master key] - Connect. Close the Playback view with ESC to disconnect. For more information see Master Playback - Playback Keys.
PAGE 903
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 When DATA is active absolute data is shown, for example Pan 50%. When DATA is off, referenced data is shown, for example F1 (focus palette 1) • [DATA] - Toggle Data on/off.. Keyboard equivalent: none Console Key - DELAY The DELAY key is used to set delay times to the sequence step in the A or B field of the Main Playback (depending on the Time Settings). • • • • • • [DELAY] & [IN] - Set a Delay In time. [#] [DELAY] & [OUT] - Set a Delay out time.
PAGE 904
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - Direct Select Pages The five Direct Select Page keys will activate a user setup that is auto-stored for the Direct Selects. • Press any of the five keys to access that page. For more information see Direct Select - User Setups. There is no keyboard equivalent Console Key - DISPLAY LIST The DISPLAY LIST key is available in the console mimic dock in the format ML display. • • [DISPLAY LIST] - Activate display lists and set the trackball to this mode (green).
PAGE 905
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 For more information see Effect Overview There is no keyboard equivalent Console Key - ESC The ESC key is used to close and exit all tabs and dialogues. • • • [ESC] - Exit the current dialogue. [ESC] - Close the currently selected tab. [ESC] & [C/Alt] - Lock/Unlock the console. For more information see Navigating The Tabs. Keyboard equivalent: [ESC] Console Key - FADER MODE The FADER MODE key is used to change mode for the Master Playbacks.
PAGE 906
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • [#] [FCB_Delay] - Sets the FCB times to # for the moving device channels, in the A or B field of the main playback depending on the settings for times. For more information see Sequence Times - FCB Times. There is no keyboard equivalent Console Key - FCB TIME The FCB TIME soft key in the Times soft key page, is used to set a time to FCB for the moving device channels.
PAGE 907
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Keyboard equivalent: [F] Console Key - FLIP The FLIP key will flip the pan and tilt values of the selected moving devices. • [FLIP] - Flips pan and tilt. For more information see Device Control - Flip. Keyboard equivalent: None Console Key - FOCUS This key is used to record and recall Focus palettes for moving devices. • • • • • [RECORD] & [FOCUS] - Record the next free palette for the currently selected devices.
PAGE 908
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • • [FORMAT] - Change channel sorting (all channels, non-zero channels etc) for the current channel view. [FORMAT] & [level wheel] - Zoom in channel and attribute views. [FORMAT] & [up/down arrows] - Compress/expand information in a view. For more information see Navigating - Channel Views. Keyboard equivalent: [F4] Console Key - GO The GO key starts the next crossfade in the Main Playback. • • [GO] - Start a crossfade in the Main Playback.
PAGE 909
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - GO BACK (Master Playback) The GO BACK key starts a crossfade to the previous sequence step in the master/sequence connected to the Master Playback. • [GO BACK] - Start a crossfade to the previous sequence step in the connected master. Press GO BACK during an ongoing crossfade to reverse it. For more information see Master Playback - Playback Keys. No keyboard equivalent Console Key - GOTO The GOTO key is used to crossfade into any existing preset in the Main Playback.
PAGE 910
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • [GROUP WHEEL MODE] - Activate Group Wheel Mode. For more information see Channels - Group Wheel Mode. There is no keyboard equivalent Console Key - HIGHLIGHT The HIGHLIGHT key will activate highlight mode for the currently selected devices. • [HIGHLIGHT] - Toggles Highlight mode. For more information see Device Control - Highlight Mode.
PAGE 911
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - IN The IN key is used to set In times to the sequence step in the A or B field of the Main Playback (depending on the Time Settings). • • [#] [IN] - Set an in time. [#] [DELAY ] & [IN] - Set a Delay In time.
PAGE 912
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 For more information see Select Channels. Keyboard equivalent: [H] Console Key - JUMP TO B The JUMP TO B key is used to reposition the sequence in the main playback blindly to continue from a different sequence step. • [#] [JUMP TO B] - Enter the number of a preset or sequence step (depending on the settings for this function) and press JUMP TO B to move that item to the B field of the Main Playback. For more information see Main Playback - Transport Keys, Crossfade Settings.
PAGE 913
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - LEARN ALERT LEARN ALERT is a soft key in the TIMES >LEARN soft key menu of the console main display. It is used to activate Learn Alert mode in which alert times are auto-stored when a sequence is played back. • [LEARN ALERT] - toggles learn alert mode. For more information see Sequence Times - WFA Alert Times. There is no keyboard equivalent. Console Key - LEARN MACRO The LEARN MACRO soft key in the Misc soft key page, is used to record Macros.
PAGE 914
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - LIVE The LIVE key is fundamental. It selects the Live tab and sets the channel control to the live output, through the A field of the Main Playback. • • • • [LIVE] - Select the Live tab. [LIVE] & [BLIND] - Move the channel levels from LIVE to BLIND. [C/Alt] & [LIVE] - Bring all channel levels from Live (A) to zero. [C/Alt] & [LIVE] [LIVE] - First press of LIVE takes out A, second press takes out Masters. For more information see Live.
PAGE 915
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - LOCK The LOCK key is used to lock the console frontpanel, so no key input will work. • [LOCK] - Opens the Lock dialog. For more information see Lock Console. Keyboard equivalent: None Console Key - MACRO The MACRO key in the MISC soft key page is used to activate macros. • [#] [MACRO] - Enter the number of a macro and press MACRO to activate. For more information see Macro List. There is no keyboard equivalent.
PAGE 916
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 For more information see Device Control - Mask. Keyboard equivalent: [K] Console Key - MASTER The MASTER key is used to open the Master List editor where you can see and control the master fields. • • • [MASTER] - Open the Master view. When the Master view is open, you can enter a number and press MASTER to control that master with the level wheel. [SETUP] & [MASTER] - Opens settings for this key. [MODIFY] & [MASTER] - Opens the master list.
PAGE 917
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • [C/Alt] & [MASTER PAGE] - Clear the masters. For more information see Master Pages. Keyboard equivalent: [M] (upper row) [CTRL] & [M] (lower row) Console Key - MINUS The MINUS key (-) is part of the channel select keys. It is used to subtract a channel from the current selection. It is also used for the Channel Check function. • • • • • [#] [-] - Deselect the channel,(if the console is set to operate in At Mode press MINUS and then enter the number).
PAGE 918
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • • • • • • • • • • [MODIFY] & [GROUP] - Opens the Group List. [MODIFY] & [SEQ] - Opens the Sequences List. [MODIFY] & [DYN EFFECT] - Opens the Effect List. [MODIFY] & [FOCUS] - Opens the Focus Palette List. [MODIFY] & [COLOR] - Opens the Color Palette List. [MODIFY] & [BEAM] - Opens the Beam Palette List. [MODIFY] & [PALETTE] - Opens the All Palette List. [MODIFY] & [U1-U3] - Opens the Wheel Parameter Lists. [MODIFY] & [PARK] - Opens the Park List.
PAGE 919
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 For more information see Device Control - Next & Last Mode. Keyboard equivalent: [N] Console Key - NOTE The NOTE key is used to set a note for the selected item in some lists and the Playback view. It can also be used to store favorites for the HELP system. • • • [NOTE] - Press NOTE in a list or the playback view to set a note to the selected item. [NOTE] - Press NOTE in the help system to create a favorite. [MODIFY] & [NOTE] - Opens the Notes list.
PAGE 920
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - ORGANIZER The ORGANIZER key is used to open the Organizer editor. • [ORGANIZER] - opens the Organizer editor. For more information see Organizer (1 tab) No keyboard equivalent Console Key - OUT The OUT key is used to set Out times to the sequence step in the A or B field of the Main Playback (depending on the Time Settings). • • [#] [OUT] - Set an in time. [#] [DELAY ] & [OUT] - Set a Delay Out time.
PAGE 921
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - Page+ The PAGE+ key is used to load the next page of 20 masters to a master row. • [PAGE+] - Load the next page. For more information see Master Pages. There is no keyboard equivalent. Console Key - PageThe PAGE- key is used to load the previous page of 20 masters to a master row. • [PAGE-] - Load the previous page. For more information see Master Pages. There is no keyboard equivalent.
PAGE 922
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - PALETTE (Alt P) The PALETTE key is used for recording and recalling All Palettes, containing information from all parameters in a device. • • • • • [RECORD] & [PALETTE] - Record the next free palette for the currently selected devices. [#] [RECORD] & [PALETTE] - Record a new palette for the currently selected devices. [#] [PALETTE] - Recall a recorded palette for the currently selected devices. [MODIFY] & [PALETTE] - Open the All palette list.
PAGE 923
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - PASTE The PASTE key is used to paste information that has been copied or cut. Information that can be copied, cut and pasted is Text, Sequence Steps (Sequence List), Groups (Group List), Presets (Preset List), Device Templates (Device Template List) and Attributes in the Preset List. • [PASTE] - Paste the last copied or cut object. In the Preset List a numerical argument is needed first. For more information see Copy, Cut & Paste.
PAGE 924
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • [#] [GROUP] & [+] - Add the channels in that Group from the current selection [#] [PRESET] & [+] - Add the channels in that Preset from the current selection For more information see Select Channels. Keyboard equivalent: [CTRL] & [>] Console Key - PLUS PERCENT (+%) The PLUS PERCENT key (+%) is part of the channel level keys. It is used to add 5% (default) from the current selection. It is also used for setting a selection to full in combination with the C/ALT key.
PAGE 925
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • [PRINT SCREEN] - Prints the selected tab to a jpg file in the Printout node of the Browser >Files >Print... >Printouts. For more information see Print. Keyboard equivalent: None Console Key - RANDOM The RANDOM key in the Selects Soft key page allows you to randomize the order of the channels within the current selection.
PAGE 926
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 There is no keyboard equivalent Console Key - RECORD The RECORD key is fundamental in that it is used for recording all types of data into Presets, Groups and Palettes.What is recorded depends on your Settings, where you are recording, and what your record target is. In Live: • • • • • • • • [RECORD] - Opens the recording dialogue to record the current look on stage into the next free Preset.
PAGE 927
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • • [REFRESH] & [FOCUS, COLOR, BEAM] - Refresh these values only. [REFRESH] & [ATTRIB] - Refresh all parameter values. [REFRESH] & [CHANNEL] - Refresh all intensities and parameter values For more information see Main Playback - Refresh Functions. Keyboard equivalent: [CTRL] & [Y] Console Key - RELEASE The RELEASE key is used to release channels that have been Captured. Captured channels are indicated with a red background in the channel views..
PAGE 928
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • [SAVE_COPY] - opens the save copy dialog. For more information see Save & Save As... No keyboard equivalent Console Key - SCALE SCALE is a soft key in the CHANNELS menu of the console main display. It is used to scale the output level of the selected channel(s) • • [SCALE] (held) - activates temporary scale mode. [MODIFY] & [SCALE] - activates scale mode. For more information see Channels - Scale channel levels. There is no keyboard equivalent.
PAGE 929
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • [SELECT_3rd] - Selects every 3rd random channel For more information see Shortcuts - Select Nth Functions. There is no keyboard equivalent. Console Key - SELECT ALL The SELECT ALL key is used to return to the current channel selection after using NEXT or LAST. • [SELECT ALL] - Reselects all channels after using NEXT or LAST. For more information see Device Control - Next & Last Mode.
PAGE 930
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 For more information see Content Effects There is no keyboard equivalent Console Key - SETUP The SETUP key is used to open the system settings summary tab, or in combination with keys to open the settings for that key. • • [SETUP] - Open system settings. Hold [SETUP] and press a key to open the settings for that key (RECORD, GO, CHANNEL etc). For more information see System Settings.
PAGE 931
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Keyboard equivalent: [S] Console Key - SEQ + The SEQ + key is used to step to the next step in the sequence of the main playback, without using times. • [SEQ +] - Step to the next step. For more information see Main Playback - Transport Keys. Keyboard equivalent: [X] & [down arrow] Console Key - SEQ The SEQ - key is used to step to the previous step in the sequence of the main playback, without using times. • [SEQ -] - Step to the previous step.
PAGE 932
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 There is no keyboard equivalent Console Key - SOLO The SOLO key is used to solo the output of a playback, temporarily muting the rest. • • [SOLO] & [PLAYBACK] - Toggles solo mode for the main playback. [SOLO] & [MasterKey] - Toggles solo mode for a master playback. For more information see Mute & Solo - Solo. Keyboard equivalent: None Console Key - START The START key is used to start fades in any master playback. • • • [#] [START] - Fade master # to full.
PAGE 933
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • • • [TAB] & [right/left arrow] - Move the selected tab to the next screen. [TAB] & [level wheel] - Resize the lower part of a spreadsheet view. [SETUP] & [TAB] - Open a dialogue to park a tab so it can't be closed with ESC. [C/Alt] & [TAB] - Reset all Tabs to default (Live and Playback). For more information see Navigating - Tabs. Keyboard equivalent: [TAB] Console Key - TAP The TAP key is used to set a tempo to an effect.
PAGE 934
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - TIME The TIME key is used to set In/Out times to the sequence step in the A or B field of the Main Playback (depending on the Time Settings). • • • • • • • • • [#] [TIME] - Set an In/Out time to the next fade in the main playback. [#] [CHANNEL] & [TIME] - Set a channel time to the selected channel(s). [#] [TIME] & [FOCUS] - Set a parameter time. [#] [TIME] & [COLOR] - Set a parameter time. [#] [TIME] & [BEAM] - Set a parameter time.
PAGE 935
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key - TYPE The TYPE key is used to change type of data in the Direct Select key sections. • Hold [TYPE] - When this key is held, you can use the direct select keys to select a type (Group, Focus, Color, Beam, Auto Group, Screens, etc) for each section of direct select keys. For more information see Direct Select - Content. There is no keyboard equivalent.
PAGE 936
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • • • • [UPDATE to open the update dialogue for the Preset loaded to the A field of the main playback. [UPDATE] & [direct select key] - Update a Palette or Group. [UPDATE] & [@LEVEL] - Open the intensity tracking dialogue. [UPDATE] & [ATTRIB] - Open the attributes tracking dialogue. For more information see Presets - Update, Track - Track Editing.
PAGE 937
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Soft Key Menu - Channels The CHANNELS soft key, is used to open the Channels soft key page with channel tools. • [Channels] - Opens the Channels soft key page. For more information see Channels - Soft key page . There is no keyboard equivalent Soft Key Menu - Device The DEVICE soft key, is used to open the Device soft key page with device tools for control and editing. • [Device] - Opens the Device soft key page. For more information see Devices - Functions.
PAGE 938
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Soft Key Menu - Misc The Misc soft key, is used to open the Miscellaneous soft key page. • [Misc] - Opens the Miscellaneous soft key page. For more information see Misc Soft Key Page. There is no keyboard equivalent Soft Key Menu - Select The SELECT soft key, is used to open the Select soft key page with tools for selecting a sub-set of channels from the current selection. • [Select] - Opens the Select soft key page. For more information see Select - Sub-selection Functions.
PAGE 939
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key Shortcuts This is a summary of all keys and shortcuts, organised by the type of function.
PAGE 940
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Select Channels These are the keys and shortcuts for selecting channels. Some of them assume the Command Syntax is set to RPN - see Channels - Command Syntax. DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Select a channel [#] [CHANNEL] Add channel to the channel selection [#] [+] Subtract channel from the channel selection [#] [-] Select a range of channels [#] [THRU] Step to the next channel [+] Step to the previous channel [-] Select all channels with a level in the Main Playback.
PAGE 941
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Channel Levels These are keys and shortcuts for setting levels to the currently selected channels. Some of them assume the Command Syntax is set to RPN - see Channels - Command Syntax.
PAGE 942
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Channel Modes Functions for checking, balancing & comparing channels.
PAGE 943
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Channel Views These shortcuts control the channel views. DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Scroll in the active channel view [CHANNEL] & [Arrow_Keys] Scroll in the active channel view [CHANNEL] & Wheel Toggles Channel View formats. [FORMAT] Selects Channel Layout #. [#] [FORMAT] Zooms the Channel View. [FORMAT] & Wheel Toggle channel symbols in Channel Layout. [FORMAT] & [Arrow_Keys] Show temporary Captured format. [FORMAT] & [CAPTURE] Show temporary Parked format.
PAGE 944
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 945
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Spreadsheet Editing These functions are for editing in Spreadsheets. DESCRIPTION SYNTAX The arrow keys are used to navigate in a spreadsheet or list, but also in combination with all the other navigation keys for different functions.
PAGE 946
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Navigation Keys The top four Navigation keys are central in the Navigating functions of the console. They are mostly used in combination with the General Editing keys. DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Focuses the Browser. If the Browser is already focused, it will be closed. [BROWSER] Scrolls the size of the Browser. [BROWSER] & Wheel Toggles through all open tabs. [TAB] Focuses Tab #. [#] [TAB] Scrolls the divider in a spreadsheet tab.
PAGE 947
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Master Playbacks These are the main keys and shortcuts for managing content in the Master Playbacks. See also Shortcuts - Recording Functions.
PAGE 948
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Master control functions DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Activate the Master View* [MASTER] Open the Master Editor. [MODIFY] & [Master_Key] Set an individual flash level (in flash mode) [#] [FLASH_MODE] & [Master_Key] Toggle a master on/off [START] & [Master_Key] Toggle master # on/off [#] [START] Fade a master to a specific level [#] [START] & [Master_Key] Hold FLASH MODE and press master keys to toggle modes. Use PAGE +/- to select functions.
PAGE 949
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Masters & Channels Functions for selecting channels to and from Master Playbacks. DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Select the channels of a Preset/Group in a Master Playback.
PAGE 950
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 *Depends on the Master Page Settings. See System Settings - Master. **It is also possible to hold DISPLAY LIST and press the Direct Select key Mast Page. Shortcuts - Devices To Home Position Functions for recording & setting Home positions to the selected Devices.
PAGE 951
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Device Attribute Editors Keys and shortcuts for opening Attribute Editors for Devices.
PAGE 952
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Device Masking Keys and shortcuts for masking Device Attributes from recording.
PAGE 953
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Device Palette Activating Keys and shortcuts for activating values in Device Palettes for the currently selected device(s).
PAGE 954
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Device Palette Specials Keys and shortcuts for special Device Palette functions.
PAGE 955
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Device Palettes In Masters Keys and shortcuts for handling Device Palettes in Master Playbacks.
PAGE 956
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Patch & Outputs Keys and shortcuts for patch and output functions. Select outputs and open Patch lists DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Select an output for temporary direct control - opening [#] [OUTPUT] the Output Editor.
PAGE 957
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Track Track is applied to the current channel selection. See Select Channels. DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Track in the Sequence of the Main Playback. [TRACK] Track in all Sequences [TRACK] & [SEQ] Track in the Sequence of a Master Playback. [TRACK] & [Master_Key] Track in Presets. [TRACK] & [PRESET] Track in Groups. [TRACK] & [GROUP] Track in Focus Palettes. [TRACK] & [FOCUS] Track in Color Palettes. [TRACK] & [COLOR] Track in Beam Palettes.
PAGE 958
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Presets Presets can be loaded and recorded in many ways. There are shortcuts also for selecting all channels in a Preset, or fetching the levels.
PAGE 959
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Groups Groups can be loaded and recorded in many ways. There are shortcuts also for selecting all channels in a Group, or fetching the levels. See also Shortcuts - Recording Functions.
PAGE 960
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Live & Blind These are keys and shortcuts for loading and clearing the content of Live and Blind. DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Sets the Channel Control to the A field of the Main Playback, and focuses the Live tab. [LIVE] Sets the Channel Control to the Blind field and focuses the [BLIND] Blind Tab.
PAGE 961
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Record Functions These are shortcuts for recording Presets, Groups and master pages.
PAGE 962
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Channel Text Wizard This is the shortcut for opening the Channel Text Wizard that sets texts to the Channel Database directly from a Channel View. DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Open the Channel Text Wizard for the current channel selection. [CHANNEL] & [TEXT] Shortcuts - Main Playback These are shortcuts for the Sequence in the Main Playback.
PAGE 963
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 964
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 965
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Capture & Release Functions for capturing & releasing channels.
PAGE 966
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 967
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Dynamics (old) These Dynamics functions can be used to start/stop and control older Dynamic Effects. Many of them are soft keys in the Dynamics Soft Key Page. See Dynamics - Control.
PAGE 968
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 969
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Shortcuts - Times Keys and shortcuts for setting times. Times are set to the Active Sequence Step (in A) or the Next Sequence Step (in B) depending on the Time Settings. See System Settings - Crossfade.
PAGE 970
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 ACCESSORIES This Chapter is about accessories and options, such as remote control, networking, printer, fader wing panel, keyboard etc.
PAGE 971
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Accessories - Keyboard An external keyboard will simulate most keys of the console. See the Console Functions Table below. This is simple to work with, since the keyboard works exactly like the console. For example pressing R is the same as pressing RECORD, and pressing 1 is the same as pressing Master key 1. WARNING Multi-media keyboards may have special keys, for example SLEEP - which puts CONGO - to sleep.
PAGE 972
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 973
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 974
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Console Key Keyboard Key SEQ - X & Up SEQ + X & Down SETUP F11 START N/A TAB TAB TEXT Alt T THRU Keypad / TIME T TRACK F12 U1 N/A U2 N/A U3 N/A UPDATE U REFRESH V UPDATE PALETTE (softkey) N/A WIZARD W Keyboard - Level Wheel You can use a mouse wheel (or right click held) to emulate the level wheel for setting levels and navigating. See Ext. Mouse Or Trackball. Keyboard - CH Step You can hold CTRL and use the left/right arrows to emulate CH+ and CH-.
PAGE 975
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Accessories - Mouse or Trackball You can use an external USB mouse or trackball in the same way as the built in trackball. Connect it to the USB port. Cobalt is designed to be used without a mouse as button pressing is faster and does not force you to look at the screen cursor. However, there are a lot of useful mouse functions for situations where you find it practical. For example, working in a workstation without a console facepanel, or while using an offline editor.
PAGE 976
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Accessories - Remote Control This system can connect optional remote controls for controlling channels and levels. Note that each remote control has its own working field. Also see Remote Controls.
PAGE 977
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Remote Control - Introduction There are a number of options for remote controlling a Cobalt system. There are three main kinds of wireless remote controls. RFR Phone Remote iRFR The RFR Radio/USB Remote is equipped with a display and bidirectional communication. A wireless phone can be connected to the RJ11 connector in the back and be used for basic remote functions. iRFR is a software for iPhone and iPod that provides bi-directional communication over a wireless LAN.
PAGE 978
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Remote Control - RFR Radio Remote The RFR Radio Remote provides bi-directional remote control with a hardware designed for stage environment. All of the RFR functions are the same for iRFR. The RFR works within its own field and this field can be cleared from the console. All channel intensity levels generated by the remote can only be recorded into targets from the remote control itself. Connecting the RFR It's possible to connect the RFR in the following ways to a Cobalt.
PAGE 979
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Top Level Soft1-6 give direct access to basic channel functionality. Pressing MORE SK will always return to this level. Pressing MORE SK from the Top Level will show the other menus. All 100% Check+ Group 0% Check- In all displays, the wheel controls the level of the selected channel(s). RFR Channel functionality The most common channel functions can be used to select channels and set levels (At Mode Command Syntax is supported from v5.1).
PAGE 980
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 RFR Group List Press MORE SK and then GROUP to get a list of recorded Groups to select from. Use the wheel(s) to focus the item you want and click the wheel button to activate it. # GROUP selects the item directly without showing the list. Normally the wheel scrolls one step per click. If you hold the wheel button and scroll, it will step in complete pages instead for faster navigation. Pressing MORE SK will display the other available display pages.
PAGE 981
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 RFR Playback Playback Press MORE SK and then PLAYBACK to enter the Playback sub menu. The Playback functions are Go Goto Record GoBack Preset Update Function Key Feedback GO [Go] Next crossfade is started GO Back [GoBack] Crossfades back to the previous step Goto preset/step [#] [Goto] Crossfades to preset # or step # (depending on the GOTO jumps to setting in Setup) Record preset [#] [Record] Records Preset # into the Preset List.
PAGE 982
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 The Patch functions are Function Key Feedback Select channel [#] [Chan] Channel # is selected Select output [#] [Output] Output # is selected Select output universe [#] [Univ.
PAGE 983
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 RFR Focus Mode Focus mode is intended for updating palettes, mainly Focus palettes. See Device Palettes - Focusing mode. Press MORE SK and then FOCUSING to enter focusing mode. Focus Color Beam Update 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select a palette from the FCB list buttons. This will enter channel/parameter mode. Use Next/Last/SelAll buttons to select channels. Use ParamFCB buttons to select the parameter. Use wheels to change. Press the Mode button to go back to palette select/update screen.
PAGE 984
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Remote Control - Phone Remote The Phone Remote option allows you to use a standard phone - without a phone line - to remote control channels and levels. Connect the base station of a standard wireless phone directly to get a low-level remote control solution. Activate the handset for an internal call (depends on the system how this is done) and use the numeric keypad to control channels and levels directly.
PAGE 985
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 986
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 [1] [#] [SHIFT] [CHANNEL] [SHIFT] [100%] If a console is set to work in At Mode, channel selection functions on the remote behave differently. For example: Set channels 1 thru 5 to 55% [1] [SHIFT] [THRU] [5] [SHIFT] [@Level] [5] [5] Set channels 1 thru 6 at full [1] [SHIFT] [THRU] [6] [SHIFT] [100%] Note: When recording from the remote, only levels set from the remote are recorded, not the whole stage output.
PAGE 987
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Remote Control - iRFR The iRFR Remote option allows you to use an iPhone or an iPod Touch with a wireless network as a remote for Cobalt. The iRFR works within its own field and this field can be cleared from the console. All channel intensity levels generated by the remote can only be recorded into targets from the remote control itself. Requirements: iPhone or iPod touch and a wireless network. More information online: http://www.etcconnect.com/product.overview.
PAGE 988
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 The functionality of iRFR is the same as RFR. See Remote Control RFR Radio Remote. Tip 1 To turn the encoder wheels, simply drag with your finger. To press the encoder wheels, one quick tap will do the trick. Tip 2 Tap the Virtual RFR screen to cycle through different interface layouts. (You can also lock the layout in the Settings screen) iRFR Color Picker With the iRFR Color Picker you can select colors for your color mixing devices.
PAGE 989
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 The current color for the first selected channel is displayed by a small rotating indicator. Press anywhere on the color wheel to change the color, and the indicator will then move to the new color. iRFR Settings These are the settings you can define in the iRFR. Settings • • • • Quick Start: when this is turned ON, the iRFR skips past the splash screens and attempts to connect to the console automatically. If a connection is made, it goes straight into the Virtual RFR screen.
PAGE 990
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Default Static IP Addresses Cobalt Congo Jr Cobalt Light Server IP Address 10.101.80.101 IP Address 10.101.81.101 IP Address 10.101.82.101 Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 IP Gateway 10.101.80.101 IP Gateway 10.101.81.101 IP Gateway 10.101.82.101 RVI Wireless Router/AP iPhone/iPod IP Address 10.101.85.101 IP Address 10.101.124.101 IP Address 10.101.125.101 Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.0.
PAGE 991
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 2. At the Settings screen, select Wi-Fi. 3. At the Wi-Fi Networks screen, find the wireless network your console is on and select it. Once connected, you will see a check mark to the left of the network name. Now press the round blue arrow button to configure your network settings. 4. Now you must configure your iPhone/iPod's network settings so that it can connect to the console. The reccomended IP address is as follows for a standard static network configuration.
PAGE 992
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Testing iRFR network connectivity Once your iPhone/iPod is configured to be on the same wireless network as your console, here's a quick test to make sure the iRFR and your console can talk. 1. Launch the iRFR app on your iPhone/iPod. 2. At the Welcome screen, click Settings. 3. Fill in the Host field with the IP address of your console (see the tip below if you don't know how to locate your console's IP address).
PAGE 993
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 4. Now, press the magnifying glass to test communication between your iPhone/iPod and the console. You will see either a green checkmark for YES or a red circle with a line through it for NO. 5. If the communication test FAILS, double-check that you have entered the correct IP address of your console in the Host field at the Settings screen. If the test still fails, exit the iPhone/iPod home screen and verify that you are still connected to your console's WiFi network.
PAGE 994
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Connecting iRFR to your console If you have tested your network you are ready to connect to Cobalt. 1. You need to have Remote Controls and ACN enabled in your Cobalt. No other settings or protocols need to be turned on for the iRFR to work.
PAGE 995
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 2. Launch the iRFR app on your iPhone/iPod. At the Welcome screen, select Settings. 3. At the Settings screen, enter your console's IP address in the Host field (this is different for Cobalt, Jr and Light Server, see above). If you do not see a green checkmark after entering the IP, you won't be able to connect. That means you have either entered the wrong IP address or there is a problem with your wireless network configuration.
PAGE 996
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 4. Press the Welcome button at the top left to return to the Welcome screen, and then press Connect. 5. Once connected, you will see a that you are connected to a Cobalt, and the version of software it is running. The Virtual RFR menu item will also become available.
PAGE 997
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Accessories - Visualisation Software It is possible to connect a separate computer running a visualisation software such as WYSIWYG or CAPTURE directly to Cobalt with Ethernet. In Cobalt there are two important settings. IPX and WYSIWYG/Sandnet/Capture Link. • • IPX is a protocol being used for communicating light information over Ethernet The WYSIWY/Sandnet/Capture Link enables these softwares to communicate specific features back to Cobalt - such as focusing lights.
PAGE 998
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Visualisation - Capture In the computer hosting Capture you need to make sure IPX is active and that the frame type is set to 802.3. Capture will recognize Cobalt on the network and patch it automatically providing Cobalt is set up with IPX and LINK on as described in the beginning of this chapter. Accessories - Visualisation Software. Example - getting started 1. Start Capture and open the demo play Sketching. 2. Open the demo play Sketching in Cobalt.
PAGE 999
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Accessories - Cobalt Nomad - Server & Client Using the same graphic displays as the Cobalt console, the Cobalt Nomadsoftware provides an operating environment identical to the console itself. With a complete set of alphanumeric-keyboard shortcuts for commonly used commands, Cobalt Nomad can be used to view console data or to interact with your Cobalt console. See Network - Client. Cobalt Nomad software can be run on a PC with the Windows® XP or Windows® 7 operating system.
PAGE 1000
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Accessories - Net3 Remote Video Interface The Remote Video Interface – a 2U 19” rack mount device - provides remote video and local programming functions for Cobalt and Cobalt jr. control systems. Controls on the front of the unit include the power switch, USB port and 20 buttons for commonly used functions. These buttons have default mapping – specific to the Cobalt product line, reflecting commonly used features for the designer or assistant designer.
PAGE 1001
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 X-keys ETC recommends the use of PI Engineering's X-Keys® panel with Cobalt Client software. X-Keys is a panel of user-definable keys. We have provided a file that defines the X-Keys Professional 58-key panel with the Cobalt hotkey shortcuts most used in offline programming and editing. The X-Keys Professional 58-key panel is very similar to the layout of the Cobalt keypad, so frequently used functions appear in relative positions between the actual console and the offline editor.
PAGE 1002
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Facepanel - Cobalt LS The Cobalt Light Server’s 19”-design packs the identical features, channel and output counts as the Cobalt console into a stand-alone, rack-mountable enclosure suitable for permanently installed applications. Running Cobalt’s operating software, the Cobalt Light Server is a fully independent lighting playback controller or a convenient back-up option. There are twenty keys with a shift function in the front panel that make it possible to run a lot of functions.
PAGE 1003
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 APPENDIX The Appendix contains information about control interfaces, fuses, key shortcuts etc.
PAGE 1004
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Connectors These are the connectors in the back of the console.
PAGE 1005
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Connector - Phone Remote Pin 4 Data+ Pin 5 Data - The Remote Control Setting must be turned on for the remote to work. See Settings - System. Connector - MIDI MIDI in/out (MIDI timecode, MIDI notes, MIDI Show Control (MSC). (MIDI timecode, MIDI Show Control through Net3 Gateway, SMPTE timecode through Net3 Gateway).
PAGE 1006
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Connector - External Trig 1-9 The external trig can be used for any console function by assigning appropriate Triggers in Event Lists. The external trig also allows the following functions directly. 1: Go 2: Pause 3: Go Back 4: Toggles Master 40 On/Off. The Remote Control Setting must be turned on for the remote to work. See Settings - System. Connector - Ethernet Two individually configurable Ethernet ports, 802.3af compliant PoE.
PAGE 1007
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Connector - USB Multipurpose There are 11 USB multipurpose ports for keyboard and mouse. They are located in the drawer of Cobalt20, in the back and on the frontpanel, under the power switch. Connector - Desk Light You can connect a standard desk light to the connectors in the top corners of Cobalt.
PAGE 1008
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 1009
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 MIDI MIDI allows you to interface with Time Code and other MIDI equipment.
PAGE 1010
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 MIDI - Introduction MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface. The reason you can find it in a lighting console is that MIDI today is being used for a lot more than having synthesizers to speak to each other as was intended originally. Basically MIDI is a standard for transmitting notes 0—127 (on/off) with velocity (how hard they are played) and continuous controllers such as faders (volume for example). There are more parameters but these are the basic ones.
PAGE 1011
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 MIDI - Standard MIDI All MIDI functions need to be activated in the MIDI Setup. See System Settings - MIDI. MIDI NOTES & CONTROLLERS All keys and faders can send notes and controllers when this is activated in the MIDI Settings.You can use MIDI notes and controllers to remote control any key or fader of the Console. If you connect a MIDI Sequencer you can record all key presses and fader movements in real time and play back in real time.
PAGE 1012
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 MIDI - MIDI Show Control Cobalt supports sending and receiving of MIDI Show Control (MSC) commands. GO and Pause/Resume are commands that Cobalt sends when MIDI Show Control is enabled in the setup. GO, Stop, Resume and Set commands can be sent to Cobalt from other devices to control playback actions. Enable MSC and Device ID settings In the Show Control setup there are parameters for turning MSC on/off and setting the device ID. See Play Settings - Show Control.
PAGE 1013
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Resume (Main Playback): F0 7F 01 02 01 03 F7 SET The SET command allows setting Cobalt's faders to specific levels. An MSC SET command packet looks like this: Where defines the Controller number and defines the level. These are both 14bit values, a combination of two 7-bit values. Both in and the first value is the LSB and the second value is the MSB.
PAGE 1014
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 The Controller numbers used in Cobalt are: Fader Value Master 1 00 00 Master 2 01 00 Master 3 02 00 ...
PAGE 1015
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 MIDI - Time Code Every sequence step can be triggered both manually, and by a specific MIDI Time Code time on the MIDI port. In the Sequence Editor, this time can be set or edited in a column to the far right. It is possible to enter a time code timestamp for each sequence step. When the specific time code position is reached, the sequence step will be executed providing Time Code is set to on. See System Settings - MIDI.
PAGE 1016
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Learn mode Each time GO is pressed, the current time code timestamp will be recorded in the current sequence step. See System Settings - MIDI. Trig in B or Auto Mode Normally, only Sequence steps that are in the B field will be triggered by incoming MIDI Time Code. Other Steps will not be trigged, even if the times match. It is also possible to run the system so that any Sequence Step matching a specific Time Code time is run automatically regardless if it is in the B field or not.
PAGE 1017
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 It is possible to enter timecode in a short form format. Entered digits will be assigned from right-toleft to frames, seconds, minutes and hours. Leading 0’s can be omitted. Example: 123 would be 00.00.01.23.
PAGE 1018
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 MIDI - Implementation Chart All MIDI messages described below can be sent or received on any MIDI Channel between 1 and 16. The values shown in parenthesis (like this = 144) all refer to MIDI channel 1. To be able to use other MIDI channels, you have to add the channel number and subtract 1. Example NOTE ON on channel 4 = 144 + 4 — 1 = 147. Keys All keys are transmitted as Note On and Note Off messages.
PAGE 1019
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 1020
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 1021
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 1022
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 1023
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 1024
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 1025
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 RDM Functionality The idea of RDM (Remote Device Management) is to make it possible for devices in a control network to communicate with the lighting control system. It can be used to simplify patching, addressing, and controlling modes of a device or supervising temperature via embedded sensors (when provided). There is a setting in Console Settings where you can disable "RDM Discovery" - Browser >General Settings >Console Settings.
PAGE 1026
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 never settings. The "RDM" indicator will appear once any RDM devices has been discovered. The number is the count of unpatched RDM devices - devices that you haven't patched & linked into your show yet. RDM Patching These are the basics of working with RDM and Cobalt. These steps assume you have RDM functioning, you have hung and cabled all of your devices, and that this is the first time you are working with the system: 1.
PAGE 1027
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 4. IDENTIFY: Press MODIFY in the Identify cell to tell the light to "identify itself". Depending on the type of device, this may mean the light flashes on and off, or the LCD display may flash its backlight. Consult the user manual of the device to see how the device will identify itself using RDM. 5. PATCH: In the "Patched to channel" column, enter a channel number of Cobalt and press MODIFY.
PAGE 1028
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Note that in the Browser there is a command to "Clear offline RDM", use this command to clean up the list if you have removed devices, or moved devices from port to port on the Gateway.
PAGE 1029
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Press MODIFY in this cell to re-query or store the cache (see options below) Options (press MODIFY to activate) "Querying device structure..." - This is a status that a query is going on "Device structure available. Save to cache?" - There is a structure, you can save it to cache manually (it is done at shutdown automatically). It will be loaded at the next restart of Cobalt. "Using cached device structure. Delete cache?" - Will delete the cached structure, and allow a re-query.
PAGE 1030
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 RDM Device Sensor List The Device Sensor List provides access to the sensor information an RDM Device transmits (readonly). This list is only available when there are discovered RDM devices. It is opened from the RDM Device List by pressing MODIFY in the Sensors cell of the device whose sensor data you wish to view. Regardless of which device you use to open this tab, it will show all devices of that model in the same table.
PAGE 1031
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 OSC Functionality Open Sound Control (OSC) is a content format for messaging among computers, sound synthesizers, and other multimedia devices. You can remotely control Cobalt using OSC. You can remotely control OSC devices using Cobalt. OSC is often used as an alternative to MIDI, when higher performance, higher resolution and a richer parameter space is desired. OSC messages are commonly transported across networks using (UDP/IP, Ethernet).
PAGE 1032
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • Fader and Attribute values are 0.0 to 1.0 (float) for minimum and maximum. eg "/masters/fader/1 0.5" to set Master 1 to 50%" The following commands are supported: Refresh /refreshstatus = Command to force an update of all labels and fader values Masters /masters/fader/X <0.0-1.0> /masters/key/X <0.0-1.0> /masters/flash/X <0.0-1.
PAGE 1033
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 /directselects/page/label/x /directselects/label/x Action Macro /actionmacro Executes the Action Macro in For example: /actionmacro GO PB If you are sending from Max, make sure that the whole command is sent as one string parameter, using “” around it when necessary. Transmit - OSC Output OSC output can be transmitted from an Action Macro, or from a template. In addition, sequence texts and master levels are transmitted to remote devices - see Receive - OSC Input.
PAGE 1034
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 1035
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 TUTORIALS To learn Cobalt there is only one way: browse the manual, check the tutorials, and be curious. This is a live document with new additions coming all the time.
PAGE 1036
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Tutorial - Movies In V6 we have created a library of tutorial movies that you can view in the console, on the internet and download as podcasts into your ipod or a similar media player or cell phone. Note that in Congo Jr you will need headphones, since there is no internal speaker. We are constantly creating new tutorials, check www.etcconnect.com for updates in the ETC Cobalt Tutorial channel. To open a tutorial 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 1037
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Tutorial - Power up Start by powering up your system and loading an empty or demo show. • • Connect at least one monitor. In Congo Jr you need to use a DVI splitter - the VGA connector is not in use. Press power-up in the back of the console. - The startup screen should appear looking like this. • Press MODIFY to run the Cobalt application. Once it is loaded you will get a dialogue asking if you want to use the last save show or start an new (empty) one.
PAGE 1038
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • Press LETS BEGIN to get SET PATCH 1:1. SUMMARY When you power up the console you come to a startup screen. Once this is confirmed you will get the option of loading the last saved show or starting a new one. If you choose to start a new one you will have a possibility to define the most important settings.
PAGE 1039
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Tutorial - The Demo Shows There are four demo shows in your Play folder with examples of different functions. Each of them correspond to a training tab in the media folder of the Browser. Opening first the Play and then the training tab - provides you with a virtual environment in which you can experiment with Cobalt functionality without having a real rig connected. They are patched and ready to run. • Demo Concert - A very small concert rig.
PAGE 1040
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • Demo Theatre - A very small theatre rig. • Demo Tour - A mid-sized concert rig for event & music style training. See Training Projects.
PAGE 1041
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Tutorial - Conventional Lights This is an introduction to working with conventional lights. You may want to complete the chapter Reset The System to reset the system first. This chapter contains the following sections • • • • Set Some Levels With The Wheel Record This To Master 1 Record A Preset In The Main Playback Crossfade With Default Times Set Some Levels With The Wheel 1.
PAGE 1042
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Examples Function Key Feedback 1. Select channel 1 and set a level [1] [Level_Wheel] Channel 1 is marked in orange as selected, and the level is set by the wheel. 2. Select channel 2 and set a level [2] [Level_Wheel] Channel 1 is left at its level, channel 2 is selected and marked in orange. The level is set by the wheel. 3. Select both and set them to full [ALL] [Level_Wheel] All channels with a level connected to the channel control are selected (1&2).
PAGE 1043
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Record A Preset In The Main Playback Set some new levels and record as a Preset in the Main Playback. Function Key Feedback 1. Select channel 3 and set a level [3] [Level_Wheel] Channel 3 is marked in orange as selected, and the level is set by the wheel. 2. Select channel 4 and set a level [4] [Level_Wheel] Channel 3 is left at its level, channel 4 is selected and marked in orange. The level is set by the wheel. 3.
PAGE 1044
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Tutorial - Basic Navigation Basic Navigation is how you use the hot keys in the console to navigate around the software without mouse. This chapter assumes you have opened a new play as described in Tutorial - Power up. • Press LIVE - The Live tab is opened and selected. It's marked in yellow since it's the currently active tab.
PAGE 1045
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • Press BROWSER - You are now focused on the Browser, which is the backbone of all functionality. Every function and data in the system can be accessed from here.
PAGE 1046
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 Tutorial - The Channel Views Channels are always shown in a Channel View. This view can be tab of its own like LIVE and BLIND - or it can be part of an editor like the Preset List. Select Channels • Press LIVE to select the Live tab. The symbol for a channel looks like this • The number on top is the console handle for that channel. Enter 1 and move the level wheel next to the numerical keypad (or the mouse wheel). - A yellow frame indicates that channel 1 is selected.
PAGE 1047
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • Hold FORMAT and move the Level Wheel up/down. - The Channel View will zoom in/out.
PAGE 1048
Cobalt 7.1 - 20140612 • Press FORMAT. - Everytime this is done you will toggle one step forward in this list of Channel View formats (the current format is indicated in the top right corner of the Channel View tab). - All Channels - Selected Channels - Non-Zero Channels - Captured Channels - Used In Play Channels SUMMARY All channel views are zoomable. All channel views have different formats. Channels can be selected with number and level wheel, or number and channel function.
PAGE 1049
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 1050
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 1051
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 1052
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 1053
Cobalt 7.
PAGE 1054
PAGE 1055
Corporate Headquarters  3031 Pleasant View Road, P.O.